PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - TV

TX-P50GT30B - TV PANASONIC - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free TX-P50GT30B PANASONIC in PDF.

📄 124 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question
Notice PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - page 1
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.

User questions about TX-P50GT30B PANASONIC

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your TV in PDF format for free! Find your manual TX-P50GT30B - PANASONIC and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. TX-P50GT30B by PANASONIC.

USER MANUAL TX-P50GT30B PANASONIC

Operating Instructions

Plasma Television

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operating Instructions - 1

natural_image Front view of a flat-screen computer monitor (no visible text or symbols)

VIERA

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

Please read these instructions carefully before operating this product and retain them for future reference.

The images shown in this manual are for illustrative purposes only.

Features

3D technology - Step into the 3D World.

Viewing 3D images on the Full HD panel

You can enjoy viewing 3D images on this TV by wearing the 3D Eyewear.

RealD 3D

This TV and 3D Eyewear use the 3D technology of RealD. RealD is one of the inventors in 3D technology.

freesat HD tuner built-in UK only

This TV has a built-in freesat HD tuner. freesat is a free digital TV service which broadcasts via satellite so you can receive TV, radio, interactive TV, and HD TV with crystal clear reception.

DVB-T tuner built-in

Receives DVB (Digital Video Broadcasting) digital terrestrial broadcasts.

DVB-T2 tuner built-in UK only

DVB-T2 is an advanced digital terrestrial system for more efficient transmission.

Available DVB-T2 broadcasts will be tuned automatically when you perform DVB Auto Setup.

GUIDE Plus+ (p. 23) UK only

This TV supports the TV Guide services sent from the GUIDE Plus+ system.

Sharp pictures and clear sound with HDMI connection (p. 110)

Enjoy high definition digital picture and high quality sound by using an HDMI cable.

Using USB devices

Enjoy recording and playback the digital TV programmes to the USB HDD. (p. 68, 80)

Enjoy the photo, video and music in the USB Flash Memory on Media Player. (p. 72)

Wireless LAN Adaptor for the network connection. (p. 6, 12, 14) USB keyboard, gamepad, etc. are available. (p. 111)

Timer Programming (p. 24, 58)

Timer Programming enables you to use functions such as programme reminder and programme recording to the external recorder / formatted USB HDD.

SDXC Card

This TV supports SDXC Card. SDXC is the latest standard of SD Card and a higher storage capacity card.

DLNA

DLNA is a standard that makes digital electronics easier and more convenient to use on a home network. (p. 91)

VIERA Connect - Enjoy great web entertainment (p. 17, 94)

VIERA Connect allows you to access some specific websites supported by Panasonic, and enjoy internet contents such as photos, videos, games, etc. from VIERA Connect home screen.

Q-Link and VIERA Link provide easy recording and playback, creation of a home theatre without complicated settings, etc.

VIERA TOOLS - Display special feature icons for easy accessibility (p. 36)

Special features (such as VIERA Link and Media Player) can be accessed easily by using the VIERA TOOLS button.

Dolby Digital Plus / Dolby Pulse decoders

It is possible to decode Dolby Digital Plus / Dolby Pulse multi-channel audio tracks and output as Dolby Digital Bitstream (multi-channel sound signal) from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT / HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals.

CONEQ (p. 39)

CONEQ is a technology to transduce the sound from speakers. You can enjoy sophisticated sound true to the original one.

Owner ID (p. 63)

Owner ID is an anti-theft function. Entering the PIN number and owner's personal information will help the Police to determine the owner in the case of theft.

Supports Audio Description signal (p. 19, 40) UK only

Audio Description (when broadcast) adds an additional soundtrack to describe events on screen (narration) and aids understanding and enjoyment, particularly for visually-impaired viewers.

Digital Switchover for Terrestrial broadcasts UK only

Starting in late 2007 and ending in 2012, TV services in the UK will go completely digital, TV region by TV region.

If you have any questions, please call Digital UK on 08456 50 50 50 or visit www.digitaluk.co.uk

Digital Switchover will cover a period of several weeks. When it starts you will lose all Analogue TV channels and some Digital TV channels will be missing.

You will need to retune your TV each time this happens to recover your digital channels. Analogue channels are permanently turned off, it will not be possible to recover them.

• To retune your TV [Auto Setup] in [DVB Tuning Menu]-DVB mode (p. 49)

Users of cable or satellite boxes should still retune the TV to continue to receive Freeview channels via their aerial. (Your Analogue channel for viewing Cable or Satellite services will change to a new position.)

- Due to the digital reception technologies involved, quality of the digital signals may be relatively low in some cases, despite good reception of analogue channels.

Do not display a still picture for a long time

This causes the image to remain on the plasma screen ("image retention"). This is not considered a malfunction and is not covered by the warranty.

Typical still images

  • Channel number and other logos
    • Image displayed in 4:3 mode

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Do not display a still picture for a long time - 1

  • Video game
  • Computer image

To prevent image retention, contrast is lowered automatically after a few minutes if no signals are sent or no operations are performed. (p. 114)

The recording and playback of content on this or any other device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.

This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard ("AVC Video") and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.

ROVI CORPORATION AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL ROVI CORPORATION AND/ OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. http://www.europe.guideplus.com/

Notice for DVB / Data broadcasting / IPTV functions

This TV is designed to meet the standards (as of August, 2009) of digital services.

- The compatibility with future services is not guaranteed. - Check the latest information on the available services at the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/

Contents

Be Sure to Read

Safety Precautions......4

Quick Start Guide

Accessories / Options 6
Identifying Controls 9
Basic Connection 11
Auto Setup 13

Enjoy your TV!

Basic Features

Using "VIERA Connect" 17
Watching TV 18
Using TV Guide 22
Viewing Teletext 27
Watching External Inputs 30
Viewing 3D images 32
How to Use VIERA TOOLS 36
How to Use Menu Functions 37

Advanced Features

Retuning from Setup Menu 48
Tuning and Editing Channels 50
Timer Programming 58
Child Lock 60
Input Labels 61
Shipping Condition 62
Owner ID 63
Using Common Interface 64
Updating the TV Software 65
Advanced Picture Settings 66
USB HDD Recording 68
Using Media Player 72
Using Network Services (DLNA / VIERA Connect / freesat)…84
Link Functions (Q-Link / VIERA Link) 95
External Equipment 103

FAQs, etc.

Technical Information 106
FAQs 114
On screen messages 116
Maintenance 119
Glossary 119
Index 120
Licence 121
Specifications....122

Safety Precautions

Warning

■ Mains plug and lead

To help avoid risk of electrical shock, fire, damage or injury, please follow the warnings below:

• This TV is designed to operate on AC 220-240 V, 50 / 60 Hz.
- Insert the mains plug fully into the socket outlet.
- Ensure that the mains plug is easily accessible.
- Remove the mains plug when cleaning the TV.
- Do not touch the mains plug with a wet hand.
• Do not damage the mains lead.

- Do not place a heavy object on the lead.

  • Do not place the lead near a high temperature object.
  • Do not pull on the lead. Hold onto the mains plug body when disconnecting the plug.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Mains plug and lead - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Mains plug and lead - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Mains plug and lead - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Mains plug and lead - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Mains plug and lead - 5

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Mains plug and lead - 6

  • Do not move the TV with the lead plugged into a socket outlet.
  • Do not twist the lead, bend it excessively or stretch it.
  • Do not use a damaged mains plug or socket outlet.
  • Ensure the TV does not crush the mains lead.

- Ensure the earth pin on the mains plug is securely connected to prevent electrical shock.

- An apparatus with CLASS I construction shall be connected to a mains socket outlet with a protective earthing connection.

If you detect anything unusual, immediately switch off the mains supply switch and remove the mains plug.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Mains plug and lead - 7

text_image AC 220-240 V 50 / 60 Hz

IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED MAINS PLUG

FOR YOUR SAFETY, PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.

This TV is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 10 amp fuse is fitted in this mains plug. Shall the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark on the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the mains plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.

If you lose the fuse cover the mains plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.

A replacement fuse cover may be purchased from your local dealer.

Do not cut off the mains plug.

Do not use any other type of mains lead except the one supplied with this TV.

The supplied mains lead and moulded plug are designed to be used with this TV to avoid interference and for your safety.

If the socket outlet in your home is not suitable, get it changed by a qualified electrician.

If the plug or mains lead becomes damaged, purchase a replacement from an authorized dealer.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED MAINS PLUG - 1

natural_image Illustration of a plug with a screwdriver inserted, showing a downward arrow (no text or symbols)

WARNING: - THIS TV MUST BE EARTHED.

How to replace the fuse.

Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.

Warning

Take care

To help avoid risk of electrical shock, fire, damage or injury, please follow the warnings below:

  • Do not remove covers and never modify the TV yourself as live parts are accessible when they are removed. There are no user serviceable parts inside.
  • Do not expose the TV to rain or excessive moisture. This TV must not be exposed to dripping or splashing water and objects filled with liquid, such as vases, must not be placed on top of or above the TV.
  • Do not expose the TV to direct sunlight and other sources of heat. To prevent fire never place any type of candle or naked flame on top or near the TV.
  • Do not place the TV on sloped or unstable surfaces, and ensure that the TV does not hang over the edge of the base.
  • Do not insert foreign objects into the TV through the air vents.
  • Do not use an unapproved pedestal / mounting equipment. Be sure to ask your local Panasonic dealer to perform the setup or installation of approved wall-hanging brackets.
  • Do not apply strong force or impact to the display panel.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Take care - 1

text_image below. en they are No No No

To prevent the spread of fire, keep candles or other open flames away from this product at all times

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To prevent the spread of fire, keep candles or other open flames away from this product at all times - 1

Small object

This product contains possibly dangerous parts that can be breathed in or swallowed by young children accidentally.

  • Keep the dangerous parts out of reach of young children.
  • Do not allow children to handle SD Card. As with any small object, the SD Card could be swallowed by young children. Please remove SD Card immediately after use and store out of reach of young children.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Small object - 1

Caution

Ventilation

Allow sufficient space around the TV in order to help prevent excessive heat, which could lead to early failure of some electronic components.

- Ventilation should not be impeded by covering the ventilation openings with items such as newspapers, tablecloths and curtains.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Ventilation - 1

- Whether you are using the pedestal or not, always ensure the vents in the bottom of the TV are not blocked and there is sufficient space to enable adequate ventilation.

■ Moving the TV

Before moving the TV, disconnect all cables.

  • The TV is heavy. Move the TV with at least two people. Support as shown to avoid injury by the TV tipping or falling.
  • Transport only in upright position. Transporting the TV with its display panel facing upward or downward may cause damage to the internal circuitry.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Moving the TV - 1

text_image Minimum distance 10 10 10 7 (cm)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Moving the TV - 2

natural_image Illustration of two workers installing or adjusting a computer monitor, with a magnified inset showing hands performing maintenance (no text or symbols)

■ When not in use for a long time

This TV will still consume some power even in the Off mode, as long as the mains plug is still connected to a live socket outlet.

- Remove the mains plug from the wall socket when the TV is not in use for a prolonged period of time.

Excessive volume

Do not expose your ears to excessive volume from the headphones. Irreversible damage can be caused.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Excessive volume - 1

Accessories / Options

Standard accessories

Remote Control
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Standard accessories - 1
N2QAYB000572

Batteries for the
Remote Control (2)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Standard accessories - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Standard accessories - 3
Pedestal
TX-P42GT30B: TX-P46GT30B/
• TBL5ZX0063 TX-P50GT30B :
• TXFBL5Z0007 • TBL5ZX0067
• TXFBL5Z0017 • TXFBL5Z0009
→(p.7) • TXFBL5Z0019

Clamper

• TMME289

→ (p. 11)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Standard accessories - 4
Ferrite core (2)
(Large size)
J0KG00000014
→ (p. 12, 104)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Standard accessories - 5
Ferrite core
(Small size)
J0KG00000011
→ (p. 105)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Standard accessories - 6

Operating Instructions Product Registration Leaflet

Use the Ferrite cores to comply with the EMC standard.

Terminal adaptors

Satellite adaptor

K1TYYYY00158

→ (p. 11, 103)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Terminal adaptors - 1

RF adaptor

K1TYYYY00159

→ (p. 11, 12, 103)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Terminal adaptors - 2

SCART adaptor

K1HY20YY0008
→ (p. 11, 12, 103)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Terminal adaptors - 3

COMPONENT adaptor

K2KYYYY00137
→ (p. 103)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Terminal adaptors - 4

Composite adaptor
K2KYYYY00136
→ (p. 104)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Terminal adaptors - 5

Audio adaptor
K2KYYYY00138
→ (p. 103, 104)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Terminal adaptors - 6

Optical digital audio adaptor

K7CXGYC00001
→ (p. 104)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Terminal adaptors - 7

Optional accessories

Please contact your nearest Panasonic dealer to purchase the recommended optional accessories. For additional details, please refer to the manual of the optional accessories.

3D Eyewear set

(Batterytype)(Rechargeabletype)

• TY-EW3D10E

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 3D Eyewear set - 1

• TY-EW3D2LE
• TY-EW3D2ME
• TY-EW3D2SE

  • If you need 3D Eyewears additionally, please purchase this optional accessory.
    • For more information :

http://panasonic.net/avc/viera/3d/eu.html

Wireless LAN Adaptor

DY-WL10E-K

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Wireless LAN Adaptor - 1

Caution

  • To use the Wireless LAN Adaptor, an access point needs to be obtained.
  • It is recommended to use the Wireless LAN Adaptor with the extension cable.
  • To avoid malfunctions caused by radio wave interference, keep the TV away from the devices such as other wireless LAN devices, microwaves and the devices that use 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz signals when using the Wireless LAN Adaptor.
  • Depending on the area, this optional accessory may not be available.
  • Additional information for Wireless LAN Adaptor and access point may be on the following website. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/

Communication Camera

• TY-CC10W

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Communication Camera - 1

Caution

• This camera can be used on VIERA Connect (p. 17, 94).
- Please also read the manual of the camera.
- Depending on the area, this optional accessory may not be available.
For details, consult your local Panasonic dealer.

Wall-hanging bracket

• TY-WK4P1RW

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Wall-hanging bracket - 1

Rear of the TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Wall-hanging bracket - 2

text_image 400 mm 300 mm

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Wall-hanging bracket - 3

Depth of screw : minimum 10 mm, maximum 16 mm

Diameter : M8

Screw for fixing the TV onto the wall-hanging bracket (not supplied with the TV)

(View from the side)

Holes for wall-hanging bracket installation

Warning

  • Using other wall-hanging brackets, or installing a wall-hanging bracket by yourself have the risk of personal injury and product damage. In order to maintain the unit's performance and safety, be absolutely sure to ask your dealer or a licensed contractor to secure the wall-hanging brackets. Any damage caused by installing without a qualified installer will void your warranty.
  • Carefully read the instructions accompanying optional accessories, and be absolutely sure to take steps to prevent the TV from falling off.
  • Handle the TV carefully during installation since subjecting it to impact or other forces may cause product damage which will void your warranty.
  • Take care when fixing wall brackets to the wall. Always ensure that there are no electrical cables or pipes in the wall before hanging bracket.
  • To prevent fall and injury, remove the TV from its fixed wall position when it is no longer in use for an extended period of time.

Installing / removing remote's batteries

1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Installing / removing remote's batteries - 1

text_image Pull open Hook

2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Installing / removing remote's batteries - 2

text_image Close Note the correct polarity (+ or -)

Caution

  • Incorrect installation may cause battery leakage and corrosion, resulting in damage to the remote control.
  • Do not mix old and new batteries.
  • Replace only with same or equivalent type. Do not mix different battery types (such as alkaline and manganese batteries).
  • Do not use rechargeable (Ni-Cd) batteries.
  • Do not burn or break up batteries.
    Batteries must not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire, etc.
    • Make sure you dispose of batteries correctly.
  • Ensure batteries are replaced correctly, there is danger of explosion and fire if battery is reversed.
  • Do not disassemble or modify the remote control.

Attaching / removing the pedestal

To help avoid risk of damage or injury by the TV tipping or falling, please follow the warnings and cautions below:

Warning

- Do not disassemble or modify the pedestal.

Caution

  • Do not use any pedestal other than the one provided with this TV.
  • Do not use the pedestal if it becomes warped or physically damaged. If this occurs, contact your nearest Panasonic dealer immediately.
  • During setup, make sure that all screws are securely tightened.
  • Ensure that the TV does not suffer any impact during installation of the pedestal.
  • Ensure that children do not climb onto the pedestal.
    • Install or remove the TV from the pedestal with at least two people.

A Assembly screw (4)

(silver)

- XYN5+F20FN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Caution - 1

M5 × 20

© Assembly screw

(black)

- XSB4+8FNK

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Caution - 2

M4×8

E Base

TBL5ZX0063

(TX-P42GT30B)

TBL5ZX0067

( TX - P46GT30B TX - P50GT30B )

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Caution - 3

B Assembly screw (4)

(black)

• THEL087N

(TX-P42GT30B)

• THEL088N

( TX - P46GT30B TX - P50GT30B )

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Caution - 4

M5 × 25

D Pole

TBL5ZA3055

(TX-P42GT30B)

TBL5ZA3065

( TX - P46GT30B TX - P50GT30B )

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Caution - 5

F Cover

• TXFBL5Z0017

(TX-P42GT30B)

• TXFBL5Z0019

( TX - P46GT30B TX - P50GT30B )

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Caution - 6

1 Assembling the pedestal

Use the assembly screws Ⓐ to fasten the pole Ⓓ to the base Ⓔ securely.

• Make sure that the screws are securely tightened.
- Forcing the assembly screws the wrong way will strip the threads.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Assembling the pedestal - 1

text_image A D E Front

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Assembling the pedestal - 2

Attach the cover ^F with assembly screw ^C

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Assembling the pedestal - 3

text_image Diagram of a mechanical device with labeled parts F and C, showing a base structure and mounting base.

2 Securing the TV

Use the assembly screws Ⓑ to fasten securely.

  • Tighten the four assembly screws loosely at first, then tighten them firmly to fix securely.
  • Carry out the work on a horizontal and level surface.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Securing the TV - 1

text_image Arrow mark Hole for pedestal installation

(View from the bottom)

Removing the pedestal from the TV

Be sure to remove the pedestal in the following way when using the wall-hanging bracket or repacking the TV.

1 Remove the assembly screws ^® from the TV.
2 Pull out the pedestal from the TV.
3 Remove the assembly screw from the cover.
4 Pull out the cover.
5 Remove the assembly screwsA from the pole.

Adjusting the panel to your desired angle

- Do not place any objects within the full rotation range.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Adjusting the panel to your desired angle - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Adjusting the panel to your desired angle - 2
(View from the top)

*:15°

(TX-P42GT30B)

*:10°

(TX-P46GT30B, TX-P50GT30B)

Identifying Controls

Remote Control

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Remote Control - 1

text_image 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 INPUT TV AV MENU ASPECT DIRECT TV REC EXIT VIRALINK GUIDE OK OPTION BACKI RETURN TEXT STTL INDEX HOLD 1 2 abcdef 3 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 8 tuvpqrs xyz 0 LAST VIEW + - REC PROGRAMME DVDVCR TV Panasonic TV 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

1 Standby On / Off switch

• Switches TV On or Off standby

2 3Dbutton (p. 34)

• Switches to the viewing mode between 2D and 3D

3 [Main Menu] (p. 37)

- Press to access Picture, Sound, Timer and Setup Menus

4 Aspect (p. 21)

- Changes aspect ratio

5 Information (p. 18)

• Displays channel and programme information

6 VIERA TOOLS (p. 36)

- Displays some special feature icons and accesses easily

8 OK

• Confirms selections and choices
- Press after selecting channel positions to quickly change channel
• Displays the Channel List

9 [Option Menu] (p. 20)

- Easy optional setting for viewing, sound, etc.

10 Teletext (p. 27)

• Switches to teletext mode

11 Subtitles (p. 21)

- Displays subtitles

12 Numeric buttons

  • Changes channel and teletext pages
  • Sets characters
  • When in Standby mode, switches TV On (Press for about 1 second)

13 Sound Mute

• Switches sound mute On or Off

14 Volume Up / Down

15 Input mode selection

• TV - switches freesat / DVB / Analogue / Other Sat. / Satellite mode → (p. 18)

• AV - switches to AV input mode from Input Selection list

→(p.30)

16 Direct TV Recording (p. 97, 99)

• Records programme immediately in DVD Recorder / VCR with Q-Link or VIERA Link connection

17 [VIERA Connect] (p. 17, 94)

• Displays VIERA Connect home screen

18 Exit

- Returns to the normal viewing screen

19 TV Guide (p. 22)

20 Cursor buttons

• Makes selections and adjustments

21 Return

- Returns to the previous menu / page

22 Coloured buttons

(red-green-yellow-blue)

• Used for the selection, navigation and operation of various functions

23 Hold

  • Freeze / unfreeze picture
    → (p. 20)
  • Holds the current teletext page (teletext mode) (p. 28)

24 Index (p. 29)

- Returns to the teletext index page (teletext mode)

25 Last view (p. 19)

• Switches to previously viewed channel or input mode

26 Channel Up / Down

27 Connected equipment operations

→ (p. 31, 71, 79, 81, 101)

TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - TV - 1

text_image Common Interface 1 2 3 USB 1 (HDD) HDMI HDMI1 HDMI2 (ARC) HDMI3 HDMI4 12 F 5 6 TV 7 +/I 910118

1 CI slot→(p. 64)
2 SD Card slot →(p. 72)
3 USB 3 port →(p. 68, 104)
4 HDMI1 - 4 terminal →(p. 103)
5 Function select

• [Volume] / [Contrast] / [Brightness] / [Colour] / [Sharpness] / [Tint] (NTSC signal) / [Bass] * / [Treble]* / [Balance] / [Auto Setup] (p. 48, 49) *[Music] or [Speech] mode in the Sound Menu

6 Channel Up / Down, Value change (when using the F button), Switching the TV On (press either button for about 1 second when in Standby mode)

7 Changes the input mode
8 Mains power On / Off switch

- Use to switch the mains power. If you turned the TV Off during Standby mode by the remote control last time, the TV will be in Standby mode when you turn the TV On with Mains power On / Off switch.

9 Remote control signal receiver

- Do not place any objects between the TV remote control signal receiver and remote control.

10 C.A.T.S. (Contrast Automatic Tracking System) sensor
- Senses brightness to adjust picture quality when [C.A.T.S.] in the Picture Menu is set to [On]→ (p. 38)
11 Power and Timer LED
- Red : Standby Green : On Orange : Timer Programming On
Orange (flash): Recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording in progress Red with orange flash: Standby with Timer Programming On, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording
- The LED blinks when the TV receives a command from the remote control.
12 Infrared transmitter for 3D Eyewear
- Do not place any objects between the transmitter and 3D Eyewear.

Using the On Screen Displays - Operation guide

Many features available on this TV can be accessed via the On Screen Display menu.

Operation guide

Operation guide will help you to operate by using the remote control.

Example : [Owner ID]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operation guide - 1

text_image Owner ID Please enter new PIN PIN * * EXIT 0 - 9 PIN entry

Operation guide

How to use remote control

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to use remote control - 1

Open the main menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to use remote control - 2

Move the cursor / select the menu item / select from a range of options

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to use remote control - 3

Move the cursor / adjust levels / select from a range of options

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to use remote control - 4

Access the menu / store settings after adjustments have been made or options have been set

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to use remote control - 5

Return to the previous menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to use remote control - 6

Exit the menu system and return to the normal viewing screen

Auto power standby function

The TV will automatically go to Standby mode in the following conditions:

  • no signal is received and no operation is performed for 30 minutes in Analogue TV mode
    • [Off Timer] is active in the Timer Menu (p. 20)
  • no operation is performed for the period selected in [Auto Standby] (p. 41)
    • This function does not affect the recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording and One Touch Recording.

Basic Connection

External equipment and cables shown are not supplied with this TV.

Please ensure that the unit is disconnected from the mains socket before attaching or disconnecting any leads.

There are some restrictions on placement for viewing 3D images. For details (p. 32, 33)

Example 1 Connecting dish or aerial

TV only

To ensure your satellite dish is correctly installed, please consult your local dealer.

• Also please consult the received satellite broadcasting companies for details.
- The freesat channel uses Astra 2 at 28.2^ East, and Eurobird 1 at 28.5^ East satellites. To ensure your satellite dish is correctly installed please consult your freesat registered dealer. UK only

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - TV only - 1

text_image Rear of the TV AC 220-240 V 50 / 60 Hz Mains lead Satellite adaptor (supplied) Aerial input terminal RF adaptor (supplied) Satellite cable For digital satellite broadcasts Satellite dish Terrestrial aerial RF cable For digital terrestrial and analogue broadcasts

■ Clamper (Standard accessory / Attached with the mains lead)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - TV only - 2

text_image Attach the clamper Bundle Insert the clamper in a hole hole the cables To remove from the hooks Set the tip in the hooks TV: To loosen: ① ② ③ snaps ④ Keep pushing both side snaps ⑤ knob ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨ keep pushing the knob
  • Do not bundle the Satellite cable, RF cable and mains lead together (could cause distorted image).
    • Fix cables with clampers as necessary.
  • When using the optional accessory, follow the option's assembly manual to fix cables.

Example 2 Connecting DVD Recorder / VCR and Player

TV, DVD Recorder / VCR and Player
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example 2 Connecting DVD Recorder / VCR and Player - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Rear of the TV"] --> B["HDMI"]
    B --> C["Fully wired HDMI compliant cable"]
    C --> D["HDMI"]
    D --> E["Player / 3D-compatible player"]
    E --> F["Fully wired SCART cable"]
    F --> G["AV"]
    G --> H["DVD Recorder or VCR"]
    I["Aerial input terminal"] --> J["RF adaptor (supplied)"]
    K["Terrestrial aerial"] --> L["RF cable"]
    M["Mains lead"] --> N["RF cable"]
    O["AC 220-240 V 50 / 60 Hz"] --> P["Ground"]
    Q["RF OUT"] --> R["RF IN"]

Example 3 Connecting DVD Recorder / VCR and Cable TV Box

TV, DVD Recorder / VCR and Cable
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example 3 Connecting DVD Recorder / VCR and Cable TV Box - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Rear of the TV"] --> B["AC 220-240 V 50 / 60 Hz"]
    B --> C["Aerial input terminal"]
    C --> D["Terrestrial aerial"]
    D --> E["Aerial input terminal"]
    E --> F["Mains lead"]
    F --> G["RF adaptor (supplied)"]
    G --> H["SCART adaptor (supplied)"]
    H --> I["Fully wired HDMI compliant cable"]
    I --> J["HDMI Recorder/AV"]
    J --> K["Fully wired SCART cable"]
    K --> L["AV 1"]
    K --> M["AV 2"]
    L --> N["DVD Recorder or VCR"]
    M --> N
    N --> O["RF OUT RF IN"]
    O --> P["Cable TV Box"]
    P --> Q["Cable"]
    Q --> R["RF OUT RF IN"]
    R --> S["RF cable"]
    S --> T["RF cable"]

■ Connecting to the network environment (Network connections)

To enable the network service functions (VIERA Connect, etc.), you need to connect the TV to a broadband network environment.

  • If you do not have any broadband network services, please consult your retailer for assistance.
  • Connect with LAN cable (Wired connection) or Wireless LAN Adaptor (Wireless connection).
  • Setup of the network connection will start after the tuning (when first using the TV) → (p. 14, 15)

Rear of the TV
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Connecting to the network environment (Network connections) - 1

text_image Wireless LAN Adaptor and Extension cable "Optional accessories" (p. 6) Connect to the USB 1, 2 or 3 port. Internet environment Accesspoint

Wiredconnection
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Connecting to the network environment (Network connections) - 2

text_image Ferrite core - Large size (supplied) Less than 10 cm LANcable Less than 10 cm Internet environment Installing the Ferrite core ① Pull back the tabs (in two places) ② Wind the cable twice ③ Press the cable through and close

Note

• For more information of the network connections (p. 85)

Note

• To watch 3D contents (p. 32)
- Connect to the TV's AV1 for a DVD Recorder / VCR supporting Q-Link (p. 97).
For HDMI-compatible equipment, possible to connect to HDMI terminals (HDMI1 / HDMI2 / HDMI3 / HDMI4) by using HDMI cable (p. 103).
• Q-Link and VIERA Link connection (p. 95, 96)
- Please also read the manual of the equipment being connected.
- Keep the TV away from electronic equipment (video equipment, etc.) or equipment with an infrared sensor. Otherwise, distortion of image / sound may occur or operation of other equipment may be interfered.

Auto Setup

Search and store TV channels automatically.

• These steps are not necessary if the setup has been completed by your local dealer.
- Please complete connections (p. 11, 12) and settings (if necessary) of the connected equipment before starting Auto Setup. For details of settings for the connected equipment, read the appropriate manual.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Auto Setup - 1

natural_image Illustration of a computer monitor with a cable or cable extension, no text or symbols present.

1

Plug the TV into mains socket and switch On

• Takes a few seconds to be displayed.
- If the red LED shows on the TV, press the Standby On / Off switch on the remote control for at least 1 second to turn the TV On.

Select your country

Country Selection

United Kingdom

and

2

Example : Example :
freesat Auto Setup
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 2 - 1

text_image Searching Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 TV Channels Found 8 Radio Channels Found 2 Data Channels Found 1 Channels found, creating channel list.

Auto Setup - DVB and Analogue
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 2 - 2

text_image DVB Scan Analogue Scan CH 21 CH 21 This will take about 6 minutes. CH Channel Name Type 62 | CBBC Channel 62 | BBC Radio Wales 62 | E4 62 10 Cartoon Nwk 29 33 -BDC1 Free TV: 10 Free TV: 10 Free TV: 10 Free TV: - Analogue: Analogue: Fres TV: 8 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Data: 0 Analogue: 2 Searching

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 2 - 3

① select

② set

Ireland

Search Mode

Free Channels

All Channels

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Search Mode - 1

① select

② start

Satellite Auto Setup

Satellite

Progress

This will

Checking Satellite

-

表决结果:

Satellite Auto Setup

Satellite ProgressAstra1 0% 100%
This will take up to 30 minutes.
No.Channel Names TypeQuality
6ETVFree TV10
7BBC TES 2Free TV10
8BBC TES 3Free TV10
9Free TV1 BBC FOUR
10 10BBC ChannelFree TV
11 10BeebiesFree TV
Free TV: 11 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0
Searching

Auto Setup - DVB and Analogue
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Search Mode - 2

text_image DVB Scan Analoguc Scan CH 5 CH 1 99 H:21 41 This will take about 6 minutes. CH Channel Name Type 62 | CBC Channel 62 | BBC Radio Wales 62 | E4 62 10 Cartoon Nwk CH29 CH33 Free TV: B Pay TV: D Radio: D Analoguc: Analoguc BBC1 Searching

Auto Setup will start to search for TV channels and store them.

- Actual number of channels may differ due to channel duplication.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Search Mode - 3

text_image Sending Preset Data Please wait! 0% 100% Remote control unavailable

If Q-Link or similar technology (p. 97) compatible recorder with analogue tuner is connected, analogue channel setting is automatically downloaded to the recorder. (Digital channel setting is not downloaded.)

- If downloading has failed, you can download later through the Setup Menu.

→ "Q-Link Download" (p. 41)

3

Enter your postcode UK only

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter your postcode UK only - 1

text_image Enter Postcode for local channels including space Postcode A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
  • Your postcode is required to receive local services and sort the channel order. Please ensure to include a space when entering your postcode.
  • If you skip this step, the default postcode (central London) will be set.

■ How to enter the postcode

Set characters

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to enter the postcode - 1

Exit to go to next step

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to enter the postcode - 2

(green)

  • You can set characters by using numeric buttons.
    → "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 110)

4

Setup the network connection

Setup the network connection to enable the network service functions such as VIERA Connect, etc. (p. 17, 94).

- To setup the wireless connection, the Wireless LAN Adaptor (optional accessory) is required.

Please note that this TV does not support wireless public access points.

- Ensure the network connections (p. 12) and network environment are completed before starting setup.

Select the network type

Network Setup
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the network type - 1

text_image Select Wired or Wireless Wired wireless Set later ETHERNET

[Wired] "Wired connection" (p. 12)

[Wireless] "Wireless connection" (p. 12)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the network type - 2

① select

② access

• To setup later on or skip this step

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the network type - 3

Select [Set later] or

EXIT

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the network type - 4

[Wired]

  1. Select [Auto]

Acquire IP Address

Auto

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Wired] - 1

Connection Test

Check network cable connection.
Check acquired IP address.
Check for devices using same IP address.
Check gateway connection.
Check server connection for VIERA Connect.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Connection Test - 1

① select
② access

  1. Go to the next step

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Connection Test - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Connection Test - 3

(Press twice)

Automatically setup is done and the test of the network connection starts.

  • To set manually, select [Manual] and set each item. For details (p. 87)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Connection Test - 4

: succeeded

The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - : succeeded - 1

:failed

Check the settings and connections. And then select [Retry].

[Wireless]

Select the connection type

Connection Type

Please select network connection type.

Search for access point

WPS(Push button)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the connection type - 1

① select
② access

[Search for access point]

Access points found automatically are listed.

  1. Select your desired access point

Available Access Points

No.SSIDWireless typeEncryptReception
1Access Point A11m(2.4GHz)
2Access Point B11m(5GHz)
3Access Point C11m(5GHz)

• To search access points again

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Search for access point] - 1

(yellow)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Search for access point] - 2

① select
② access

: Encrypted access point

• For the information of the highlighted access point

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Search for access point] - 3

• To set manually (p. 90)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Search for access point] - 4

(red)

  1. Access the encryption key input mode

Encryption Key Setting

Connection will be made with the following settings:-

SSID : Access Point A

Authentication type : WPA-PSK

Encryption type : TKIP

Please input the encryption key.

Encryption key

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Search for access point] - 5

- If the selected access point is not encrypted, the confirmation screen will be displayed. It is recommended to select the encrypted access point.

  1. Enter the encryption key of the access point

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Search for access point] - 6

text_image Access Point Settings Encryption key A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P O R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 : a a b c d e f g h 1 Imp 1|m n{o p,q r s t u v w X y z ( ) - .* _

Set characters

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Search for access point] - 7

① select

② set

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 110)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Search for access point] - 8

Store

BACK/RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Search for access point] - 9

4. Select [Yes]

Access Point Settings

Encryption key is set to:-

XXXXXXXXX

Select 'Yes' to confirm.

Select 'No' to change.

Yes

No

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Access Point Settings - 1

① select

② set

• To re-enter the encryption key, select [No].
- If the connection has failed, check the encryption key, settings and positions of your access point. And then, follow the on screen instructions.

  1. After the access point setting is finished, perform the connection test

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Access Point Settings - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Access Point Settings - 3

Connection Test

Check access point connection.
Check acquired IP address.
Check for devices using same IP address.
Check gateway connection.
Check server connection for VIERA Connect.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Connection Test - 1

: succeeded

The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - : succeeded - 1

:failed

Check the settings and connections. And then select [Retry].

- To set manually, select [Manual] and set each item. For details (p. 90)

  1. Go to the next step 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - :failed - 1

(Press twice)

[WPS(Push button)]

  1. Press the WPS button on the access point until the light flashes
  2. Connect the Wireless LAN Adaptor and the access point

WPS(Push button)

1) Please press the 'WPS' button on the access point until its light flashes.
2) When the light is flashing select 'Connect' on TV.

If you are unsure, please check the instruction manual of the access point.

Connect

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - WPS(Push button) - 1

  • Ensure that your access point supports WPS for this setup.
  • WPS : Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
  • If the connection has failed, check the settings and positions of your access point. And then, follow the on screen instructions.

  • After the access point setting is finished, perform the connection test

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - WPS(Push button) - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - WPS(Push button) - 3

Connection Test

√ Check access point connection.
Check acquired IP address.
☑ Check for devices using same IP address.
Check gateway connection.
☑ Check server connection for VIERA Connect.

  1. Go to the next step 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Connection Test - 1

(Press twice)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (Press twice) - 1

: succeeded

The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - : succeeded - 1

:failed

Check the settings and connections. And then select [Retry].

- To set manually, select [Manual] and set each item. For details (p. 90)

Input Owner ID

Owner ID

Please enter new PIN

PIN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Please enter new PIN - 1

Please enter your own choice of PIN number, name, etc. to help the police to crack crime.

  • Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it. The PIN number cannot be reset.
  • You can input or change the Owner ID later. [Owner ID] (p. 63)
    • To skip this step

EXIT

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Please enter new PIN - 2

- This step will be skipped in the Auto Setup after [Shipping Condition] (p. 62) is performed.

5

■ How to input Owner ID

1 Enter the PIN number (4 digits)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter the PIN number (4 digits) - 1

text_image Owner ID Please enter new PIN PIN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter the PIN number (4 digits) - 2

- Enter the PIN number twice at first setting.

2 Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) - 1

text_image Owner ID-Data Entry PIN * * * * NAME HOUSE NO POSTCODE

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) - 2

3 Enter your name, house number and postcode

Set characters

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set characters - 1

text_image User input NAME A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P O R S T U V W X Y Z G 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 8 i : # a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r t - t u v w x y z l - - - + - 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 p#e 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 p#e 0 0

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set characters - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set characters - 3

Return to select other items

BACK!

RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set characters - 4

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p.110)

- Select the next item and repeat the operations.

4 Exit to go to next step

EXIT

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Exit to go to next step - 1

6

Select [Home]

Select [Home] viewing environment (highlight [Home] in yellow) to use in your home environment.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Home] - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Home] - 2

① select

② set

■ [Shop] viewing environment (for shop display only)

[Shop] viewing environment is the demonstration mode to explain main features of this TV.

Select [Home] viewing environment to use in your home environment.

- You can return to viewing environment selection screen at the stage of Shop confirmation screen and Automatic Demo Off / On selection screen.

1 Return to viewing environment selection screen

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Return to viewing environment selection screen - 1

text_image Shop You have selected shop mode Automatic Demo Off On BACK/ RETURN

2 Select [Home]

Please select your viewing environment.

Home

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Home] - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Home] - 2

To change viewing environment later on, you will need to initialise all settings by accessing Shipping Condition.

→ [Shipping Condition] (p. 62)

Auto Setup is now complete and your TV is ready for viewing.

If tuning has failed, check the connection of the Satellite cable, RF cable, and then, follow the on screen instructions.

• To check channel list at-a-glance → "Using TV Guide" (p. 22)
• To edit or hide (skip) channels → "Tuning and Editing Channels" (p. 50 - 57)
• To retune all channels [Auto Setup] (p. 48, 49, 56)
- If you wish to tune in other satellite channels [Auto Setup] in [Other Sat. / Satellite Tuning Menu] (p. 56)
• To initialise all settings • [Shipping Condition] (p. 62)

If you connect the Wireless LAN Adaptor later on, the confirmation screen will be displayed for the setup.

• To setup the wireless connection (p. 88 - 90)

Wireless LAN adaptor connection

Wireless LAN adaptor connected, do you want to set it up?

No - Exit

Current network type: Wireless

Yes

No

Using "VIERA Connect"

VIERA Connect is a gateway to the internet services unique to Panasonic and has expanded VIERA CAST features greatly. VIERA Connect allows you to access some specific websites supported by Panasonic, and enjoy internet contents such as photos, videos, games, etc. from VIERA Connect home screen.

- This TV has no full browser function and all features of websites may not be available.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Using "VIERA Connect" - 1

text_image EXIT OK BACKI RETURN 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mnc 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wayz 0

■ To exit from VIERA Connect
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Using "VIERA Connect" - 2

• To set the VIERA Connect instruction banner display off

→ [VIERACnect Banner] (p. 43)

1

Turn power on

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Turn power on - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Turn power on - 2

text_image Vierra Connect Enjoy selected internet content with VIEA Connect. Simply press the OK / INTERNET button
  • Press for about 1 second
  • Mains power On / Off switch should be On. (p. 10)

- Every time you turn on the TV, VIERA Connect introduction banner appears. The banner is subject to change.

2

Access VIERA Connect

While the banner is displayed

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Access VIERA Connect - 1

or

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Access VIERA Connect - 2

- The button marking varies depending on the remote control supplied with your TV.

Example :

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Access VIERA Connect - 3

text_image Welcome to VIEA Connect® Don't Know 10 minutes Don't Know 20 minutes Don't Know 30 minutes Don't Know 40 minutes Don't Know 50 minutes Don't Know 60 minutes Don't Know 70 minutes Don't Know 80 minutes Don't Know 90 minutes Don't Know 100 minutes

Example : VIERA Connect home screen

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Access VIERA Connect - 4

text_image Video More Back Olimotion
  • Depending on the usage conditions, it may take a while to read all the data.
  • Messages might be displayed before VIERA Connect home screen. Please read these instructions carefully and follow the on screen instructions.

• To go to the next level
[MORE]
• To back to the previous level
→ [BACK]

■ How to operate VIERA Connect (current as of January, 2011)

• To move the cursor / select the item

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate VIERA Connect (current as of January, 2011) - 1

- When the key words are displayed on colour bar

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate VIERA Connect (current as of January, 2011) - 2

(red) (green) (yellow) (blue)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate VIERA Connect (current as of January, 2011) - 3

• To access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate VIERA Connect (current as of January, 2011) - 4

- When options with numbers are displayed

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate VIERA Connect (current as of January, 2011) - 5

• To return to the previous screen

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate VIERA Connect (current as of January, 2011) - 6

• To return to VIERA Connect home screen

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate VIERA Connect (current as of January, 2011) - 7

- Video communication (ex. Skype™) requires an exclusive Communication Camera TY-CC10W.

→ "Optional accessories" (p. 6)

For details, read the manual of the Communication Camera.

- You can connect a keyboard and a gamepad via USB port for character input and playing games in VIERA Connect. You can also operate the TV with a keyboard or a gamepad other than VIERA Connect features.

For more information "USB connection" (p. 111)

Note

  • If you cannot access VIERA Connect, check the network connections (p. 12) and settings (p. 14, 15).
    • For more information of VIERA Connect (p. 94)

Watching TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Watching TV - 1

text_image INPUT TV MENU ASPECT EXIT i GUIDE OPTION STTL HOLD 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 0 LAST VIEW + - Volume

1

Turn power on

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Turn power on - 1

  • Press for about 1 second
  • Mains power On / Off switch should be On. (p. 10)

■ VIERA Connect introduction banner appears

You can access to VIERA Connect and enjoy the various contents. (p. 17)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ VIERA Connect introduction banner appears - 1

• To remove this banner, leave for about 5 seconds or press any buttons (except the buttons to access VIERA Connect).
• To set this banner display off [VIERA Connect Banner] (p. 43)

Select the mode (freesat, DVB, Analogue, Other Sat. or Satellite)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the mode (freesat, DVB, Analogue, Other Sat. or Satellite) - 1

- The selectable modes vary depending on the selected country and stored channels (p. 13).

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the mode (freesat, DVB, Analogue, Other Sat. or Satellite) - 2

text_image TVSelection freesat DVB Analogue Other Sat. Satellite

UK only

Displayed if [Other Satellite Auto Setup] (p. 56) is completed. UK only

Ireland only

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the mode (freesat, DVB, Analogue, Other Sat. or Satellite) - 3

① select

②access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the mode (freesat, DVB, Analogue, Other Sat. or Satellite) - 4

text_image 1 BBC ONE WALES 2019-2022 eNow Info All DAB Channels Direct Favorites

- Also possible to select the mode pressing the TV button repeatedly on the remote control or side panel of the TV (p.10).

Information banner (p. 19)

3

Select a channel

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select a channel - 1

freesat channel position numbers run in the ranges 100 - 999 and 0100 - 0999.

• To select a three or four-digit channel position number, e.g. 0246

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select a channel - 2

DVB and Other Sat. / Satellite channel position numbers run from 1 onwards.

Analogue channel position numbers run in the ranges 0 - 99.

• To select a two or three-digit channel position number, e.g. 399

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select a channel - 3

■ Select a channel using Information banner (p. 19)

It is possible to confirm the channel name and programme information by using the Information banner before changing channels.

1 Display Information banner if it is not displayed

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display Information banner if it is not displayed - 1

2 While the banner is displayed, select the channel

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the banner is displayed, select the channel - 1

■ Select a channel using TV Guide (p. 22)

It is possible to confirm the channel and programme information by using the TV Guide (EPG) before changing channels.

1 Display TV Guide

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display TV Guide - 1

2 Select a current programme or channel

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select a current programme or channel - 1

3 Select [View] (DVB mode)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 1

text_image Eastender 19:30- 20:00 View Timer Programming

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 2

Note

• To watch pay-TV "Using Common Interface" (p. 64)

Other useful functions

Display Information banner

Display Information banner
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display Information banner - 1

• Also appears when changing a channel

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display Information banner - 2

text_image ation banner appears when changing a channel 1 Example : DVB 2 3 6 7 4 5 1 HDTV Coronation Street 20:00 - 20:55 Now All DVB Channels Select favouritesInfo Mute SB#d#gF#XT Multi Audio 45

1 Channel position and name

2 Channel type ([Radio], [Data], [HDTV], etc.) /

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display Information banner - 3

3 Programme

4 Current time

5 Programme Start / Finish time (except Analogue) Channel number, etc. (Analogue)

6 Progress time indicator of the selected programme (except Analogue)

7 [All DVB Channels], [freesat Channel List], [All Other Sat. Channels], [All Satellite Channels] or [Favourites1-4] (p. 53)

• To switch (DVB or Other Sat. / Satellite)

(blue)

Features available / Message meanings

[Mute]

Sound mute On

[Bad signal]

Poor TV signal quality

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Bad signal] - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Bad signal] - 2

Same programme available as HD broadcast

• To display the extra information for details

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Bad signal] - 3

Audio Description service available

- This function can aid visually-impaired viewers by adding an additional audio track to describe events on screen.

- For settings (p. 40)

[STLL]

Subtitle service available

[TEXT]

Teletext service available

[Multi Audio]

Multiple audio available

[Stereo], [Mono], [NICAM]

Audio mode

1 - 90

Off Timer remaining time

- For settings (p. 20)

• To confirm another tuned channel name

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - - 90 - 1

• To watch the channel listed in the banner

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - - 90 - 2

• Information on the next programme (except Analogue)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - - 90 - 3

• To hide

EXIT

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - - 90 - 4

• Extra information (except Analogue)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - - 90 - 5

(Press again to hide the banner)

• To set display timeout

→ [Banner Display Timeout] (p. 43)

- [AD], [STTL], [TEXT], [Multi Audio] indications are displayed as available on particular programmes, but may not be available for all individual programmes being broadcast. Display the extra information to confirm availability of these functions.

Example :

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - - 90 - 6

text_image 1 BBC ONE WALES Coronation Street 20:35 20:00 - 20:35 Now® [AD] All DVB Channels Select favourites AD

Last view

Switch to previously viewed channel or input mode easily

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Switch to previously viewed channel or input mode easily - 1

LAST VIEW

- Press again to return to the present view.

Note

  • Switching channel is not available while the recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording is in progress.
  • Watching less than 10 seconds is not regarded as the previously viewed channel or input mode.

Hold

Freeze / unfreeze picture

HOLD

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Freeze / unfreeze picture - 1

Display the selectable settings for the current status

Check or change the current status instantly

OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check or change the current status instantly - 1

• To change

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check or change the current status instantly - 2

①select

② access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check or change the current status instantly - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check or change the current status instantly - 4

select / change

④ store

[Multi Audio / AD] UK only

(freesat mode)

Allows you to select between alternative language or Audio Description for sound tracks (if available)

  • Set Audio Description [Auto] in the Sound Menu (p. 39) to select the audio description sound track. In freesat mode, Audio Description cannot be controlled separately from the audio description sound track.
  • This setting is not memorized and it will return to the default setting once you exit the current programme.

[Audio Description] UK only

(DVB mode)

Set to [Auto] if the programme has Audio Description service, then you will hear an additional audio track to describe events on screen

• To adjust the volume for Audio Description

→ [Audio Description Menu] (p. 40)

[Multi Audio]

(DVB, Other Sat. UK or Satellite Ireland mode) Allows you to select between alternative language for sound tracks (if available)

- This setting is not memorized and it will return to the default setting once you exit the current programme.

[Monaural Audio]

(except Analogue mode)

Allows you to select stereo / monaural (if available)

- This setting is not memorized and it will return to the default setting once you exit the current programme.

[Sub Channel]

(Other Sat. UK or Satellite Ireland mode) Allows you to select the multifeed programme - sub channel (if available)

[Subtitle Language]

(except Analogue mode)

Allows you to select the language in which subtitles should appear (if available)

- This setting is not memorized and it will return to the default setting once you exit the current programme.

[Teletext Character Set] Ireland only

Sets the teletext language font

→ [Setup Menu] (p. 42)

[Teletext Language] Ireland only

(DVB or Satellite mode)

Allows you to select between alternative language for teletext (if available)

[NICAM]

(Analogue mode)

Switches NICAM sound (if available)

→ [Sound Menu] (p. 40)

[Volume Correction]

Adjusts volume of individual channel or input mode

[Safely remove USB]

Takes this operation to remove the connected USB device safely from the TV

Off Timer

Turn the TV off automatically after a fixed period (Off / 15 / 30 / 45 / 60 / 75 / 90 minutes)

1 Display the menu 2 Select [Timer]

MENU

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu 2 Select [Timer] - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu 2 Select [Timer] - 2

text_image VISA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu 2 Select [Timer] - 3

3 Select [Off Timer] and set the time

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Off Timer] and set the time - 1

text_image Timer Programming Off Timer Auto Standby Off 15 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes 60 minutes 75 minutes 90 minutes

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Off Timer] and set the time - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Off Timer] and set the time - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Off Timer] and set the time - 4

• To cancel Set to [Off] or turn the TV off.
- To display the remaining time "Display Information banner" (p. 19)
- When the remaining time is within 3 minutes, the remaining time will flash on the screen.

Aspect

Change the aspect ratio (image size)

ASPECT

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Change the aspect ratio (image size) - 1

Enjoy viewing the image at its optimum size and aspect.

Programmes usually contain an "Aspect Control Signal" (Widescreen signal, etc.), and the TV will choose the aspect ratio automatically according to the "Aspect Control Signal" (p. 106).

■ If you would like to change the aspect ratio manually

1 Display Aspect Selection list

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display Aspect Selection list - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display Aspect Selection list - 2

text_image Aspect Selection Auto N.V. 40 41 Zoom1 Zoom2 Zoom3 Zoom3 Change Change(+) RETURN

Aspect Selection list

2 While the list is displayed, select the mode

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the list is displayed, select the mode - 1

① select

② store

- You can also change the mode only using the ASPECT button.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the list is displayed, select the mode - 2

(Press repeatedly until you reach the desired mode)

[Auto]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the list is displayed, select the mode - 3

The best ratio is chosen and the image expanded to fill the screen. For details (p. 106)

[16:9] [Zoom1]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the list is displayed, select the mode - 4

Directly displays the image at 16:9 without distortion (anamorphic).

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the list is displayed, select the mode - 5

Displays a 16:9 letterbox or 4:3 image without distortion.

[14:9] [Zoom2]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the list is displayed, select the mode - 6

Displays the image at the standard 14:9 without distortion.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the list is displayed, select the mode - 7

Displays a 16:9 letterbox (anamorphic) image full-screen without distortion.

[4:3] [Zoom3]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the list is displayed, select the mode - 8

Displays the image at the standard 4:3 without distortion.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the list is displayed, select the mode - 9

Displays a 2.35:1 letterbox (anamorphic) image full-screen without distortion. At 16:9, displays the image at its maximum (with slight enlargement).

Note

  • Aspect is fixed to [16:9] when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Game] in the Picture Menu.
  • Aspect cannot be changed in teletext service and 3D mode (except for [2D → 3D] mode in [3D Mode Selection] (p. 34)).
  • Aspect mode can be memorized separately for SD (Standard definition) and HD (High definition) signals.

Display subtitles

- Subtitles may not be displayed properly in 3D images.

■ freesat, DVB or Other Sat. / Satellite mode

Display / hide subtitles (if available)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ freesat, DVB or Other Sat. / Satellite mode - 1

• To change the language for DVB (if available)

→ [Preferred Subtitles] (p. 42)

■ Analogue mode

Display subtitles Hide subtitles

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Analogue mode - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Analogue mode - 2

Note

  • This is the same as switching to Analogue teletext service and selecting "P888" (subtitle service). (p. 29)
  • You cannot change the channel when this function is active.

Using TV Guide

TV Guide–Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) provides an on screen listing of the programmes currently broadcast and the forthcoming broadcasts over the next seven days (depending on the broadcasters).

- When this TV is turned on for the first time, or the TV is switched off for more than a week, it may take some time before TV Guide is completely shown.

(freesat) UK only
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Using TV Guide - 1

text_image INPUT TV EXIT i GUIDE OK OPTION BACKY RETURN

1

Select freesat

→(p.18)

TV

2

Display the Channel Genre selection list

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the Channel Genre selection list - 1

3

Select the genre and view TV Guide

Example :

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the genre and view TV Guide - 1

text_image Channel Genre Selection All Channels Entertainment News & Sport Movies Lifestyle Music Children Special Interest Radio Shopping Gaming & Dating Interactive Regional Favourites

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the genre and view TV Guide - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the genre and view TV Guide - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the genre and view TV Guide - 4

text_image Example : 5 6 1 Wed 27 Oct 2010 1 BBC ONE 26:00 - 28:30 DIY SDS - We open in the Battle-by Search All Channels Also in Time: 19:30 20:00 20:30 21:00 21:30 RBC ONE 10T Fastender DIY TV The Bill Red Cap 102 BBC 2W Hot Wars Holiday Program Drama 103 BBC NEWS Emotional Coronation Street The Bill Cinema 104 BBC 10 D' clock News BBC Pepal Char. Good bys 105 BBC THREE CoastSpring watchPanorama 106 BBC FOUR NewsPop Isolfin/Adaptability 107 BBC Radio The Bill Sports IS To 1Rugby Select channel EXIT Enter Channel Info Page up View / Timer Prog. Select programme RETURN GETRUN Page down 24 hours 1:24 hours Search Channel Genre

1 Current date and time
2 TV Guide time
3 Channel position and name
4 TV Guide date
5 Some programmes may also be broadcast in HD

- You can select HD or SD broadcast before viewing or setting Timer Programming.

6 Programme

- There might be some programmes displayed as greyed-out in TV Guide. These are the Off-Air programmes (non-running programmes).

■ To change the layout of TV Guide→ [TV Guide View] (p. 41)

■ To watch the programme

1 Select a current programme or channel
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To watch the programme - 1

or
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To watch the programme - 2
0

2 Select [View]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To watch the programme - 3

text_image Eastender 19:30- 20:00 View Timer Programming ① select ② watch

• To use Timer Programming→(p. 24)

- If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts, the [View Options] screen will be displayed to select HD or SD broadcast.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To watch the programme - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To watch the programme - 5

■ To the previous day

(red)

■ To the next day

(green)

■ View details of the programme

1 Select the programme
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ View details of the programme - 1
2 View details

• Press again to return to TV Guide.

■ To view a channel list of the selected genre
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ View details of the programme - 2

text_image (blue) Channel Genre (Channel Genre list) All Channels All Channels Entertainment News & Sport ... ... ... Favourites To list favourite channels → (p. 50)

■ To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes - 1

(yellow)

(Search list)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes - 2

text_image Search Search Titles... Movie News and Factual

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes - 3

① select type

② view

■ To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes - 1

(yellow)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes - 2

text_image (Search list) Search Search Titles... Movie News and Factual

1 Select

[Search Titles...]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select - 1

① select

-

② access

2 Set characters

(maximum: 19 characters)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set characters - 1

select

[Non-Text]

set

• To use numeric buttons

→ "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 110)

(green)

• All the programme titles including the word you set will be listed.

• Searching without any characters will list all programmes including current programmes.

(DVB or Analogue)

• This TV supports the GUIDE Plus+ system.
UK only
- The Rovi branding partner will supply the rating information in the programme information and the recommended group in the Search list. UK only
- DVB and Analogue channels are displayed on the same TV Guide screen. [D] means DVB channel and A means Analogue channel. There will be no programme listings for Analogue channels.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (DVB or Analogue) - 1

text_image INPUT TV EXIT i GUIDE OK BACKI RETURN OPTION

1

Select DVB or Analogue

→ (p. 18)

TV

2

View TV Guide

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - View TV Guide - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - View TV Guide - 2

text_image Example: UK 1 Wed 27 Oct 2010 10:46 2 BBC ONE 20:00 26:30 DIY SOS: We open in the Batteries Time: 19:30 D: 1 BBC ONE D: 7 BBC THREE Emmerdal. Emmerdal. Coronation Street 10 C' clock News BBC Pepsi Char. Good bye 72 BBC 2W Penerame Spring watch D 165 BBC I'm A Celebrity Pop Isol News D 719 BBC Radi Rugby 15 To 1 Sports Select channel 10:41 Timer Programming Select programme RETURN Info GET RETURN MTC Select Advon Page up 24 hours 124 hours Search Category

9

1 Current date and time
2 TV Guide time
3 Advertisement
4 [D]: DVB

5 Channel position and name
6 TV Guide date

To return to TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To return to TV - 1

or

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To return to TV - 2

7 Some programmes may also be broadcast in HD UK only
- You can select HD or SD broadcast before viewing or setting Timer Programming.
8 Programme
9 Logo of the Rovi branding partner UK only

■ To change the layout of TV Guide→ [TV Guide View] (p. 41)

■ To watch the programme

1 Select a current programme or channel

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select a current programme or channel - 1

or
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select a current programme or channel - 2

2 Select [View] (DVB mode)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 1

text_image Eastender 19:30- 20:00 View Programming

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 2

① select
② watch

- If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts, the [View Options] screen will be displayed to select HD or SD broadcast. (DVB mode) UK only

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 4

① select

② watch

• To use Timer Programming → (p. 24)

■ To the previous day (DVB mode)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 5

■ To the next day (DVB mode)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 6

■ View details of the programme (DVB mode)

1 Select the programme 2 View details

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 7

- Press again to return to TV Guide.

■ To view a channel list of the selected category

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 8

(Category list)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 9

text_image Category All Channels All Channels All DVB Channels All HD Channels All Analogue Channels Free DVB Channels TV/Data DVB Channels Favourites1 Favourites2 Favourites3 Favourites4 Only Analogue channels are listed To list favourite channels → (p. 53)

b search programme types and view a channel list of the searched programmes (DVB mode)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 10

UK (Search list)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 11

text_image Search Search Titles... Movie News and Factual

Ireland (Type list)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 12

text_image Prog.Type All Types All Types Movie News

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 13

■ To search programme titles and view a list of the searched programmes (DVB mode) UK only

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 14

(Search list)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 15

text_image Search Search Titles... Movie News and Factual

1 Select [Search Titles...]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 16

2 Set characters (maximum: 19 characters)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 17

3 Start [Search]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [View] (DVB mode) - 18

• All the programme titles including the word you set will be listed.
- Searching without any characters will list all programmes including current programmes.

Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode)

Timer Programming is a timer to remind watching or record the programme to the external recorder or the USB HDD.

1 Select the forthcoming programme
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 1

LED will turn to orange if Timer Programming is set. (Orange LED will flash if the recording of Timer Programming is in progress.)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 2

text_image LED

2 Select the function ([Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.] or [Reminder])
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Timer Programming (freesat or DVB mode) - 3

text_image (Timer Programming screen) Timer Programming Wed 27.10.2010 10:46 Function No. Channel Name Date Start End Est Rec. DIY SOS Wed 27 Oct 19:30 19 BBC HD 20:00 130 min. [—min.] ① select ② store

[Ext Rec.] / [USB HDD Rec.]

to record the programme to the external recorder or the USB HDD

When the start time comes, the channel will be switched automatically and the video and audio signals will be output. 2 minutes before the starting time, a reminder message appears if you are watching TV.

[Reminder]

to remind you to watch the programme

When you are watching TV, a reminder message appears 2 minutes before the start time. Press the OK button to switch to the programmed channel.

■ To check / change / cancel a timer programming event

→ "Timer Programming" (p. 58, 59)

■ If you select a current programme

A confirmation screen asking whether you wish to watch or record the programme will appear.

Select [Timer Programming] and set [Ext Rec.] or [USB HDD Rec.] to record from the time you finish the timer programming event setting.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ If you select a current programme - 1

text_image Eastender 19:30- 20:00 View Timer Programming

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ If you select a current programme - 2

■ To return to TV Guide

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To return to TV Guide - 1

■ If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts - 1

The [Timer Options] screen will be displayed to select HD or SD broadcast.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts - 3

(Timer Programming screen)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ If a programme exists in both HD and SD broadcasts - 4

text_image Timer Programming Wed 27.10.2010 10:46 Function No Channel Name Date Start End Ext Rec DIY SOS Wed 27 Oct 19:30 [19 BBC HD (30 min.) [— min.]

HD will be displayed if HD broadcast is set.

Note

• This function is not available in Analogue mode.
- Timer Programming reminder messages will remain displayed until one of the following occurs:

- You press the OK button to view the programme or the EXIT button to cancel the reminder.

- The timer programming event that the reminder is set for ends.

  • No other channel can be selected while the recording of Timer Programming is in progress.
  • When recording programmes, be sure to make the proper settings on the recorder connected to the TV. (p. 58)
  • When recording programmes to the USB HDD, be sure to format the USB HDD and enable it for recording in [Recording Setup] (p. 68).

Guide link programming is Timer Programming which is controlled by information from the TV Guide; if programme start and end times are changed by the broadcaster, the timer programming event will follow the change.

A Split Programme programming is a Guide link programming which is interrupted by one or more other programmes. Note that Guide link programming (including Split Programme programming) only works reliably if correct information is received from broadcasters.

(Timer Programming screen)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Guide link programming (Timer Programming from the TV Guide signal) UK only - 1

text_image Timer Programming Wed 27 Oct 2010 18:46 Function No. Channel Name Date Start End Ext Rec. 7 BBC ONE DIF 2010 Reminder 14 E4 The Bill Ext Rec. 72 BBC ZW Ext Rec. 1 BBC ONE Red Cap Thu 28 Oct 10:30 11:30 (60 min.) -- - Change function Store timer Excl Remaining Capacity: SELECT SOOLB (50%) 1/1 RETURN

"S/P" is displayed if the timer is set from the TV Guide and the programme is a Split Programme

"Guide" is displayed if the timer is set from the TV Guide (Guide link programming)

Example : UK
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Guide link programming (Timer Programming from the TV Guide signal) UK only - 2

text_image Wed 27 Oct 2010 18BC ONE 20:00 - 20:30 DIY SOS - We open in the BateriaVaya Time 19:30 20:00 20:30 21:00 D 1 4BC ONE Das Erste DIY SOS Holcray News D 7 8BC THREE Hot Wars Holcray Program D 14 14 Empenatal. Oronation Street The Bill D 20 8BC FOUR 10 D' clock News HBC Pepal Char Goodbye D 72 8BC ZW Panorama Spring watch Coast D 15 8BC I'm A Celebrity Pop Iool News D 17 8BC R#R Rugby 15 To 1 Sports

"Or" will be displayed in the TV Guide if Timer Programming is set as the Guide link programming.

Note

  • If you edit the start time or end time of a Guide link programming event by more than 10 minutes, it will no longer follow the broadcaster's changes to the start or end time. The start and end times will become fixed.
  • Whilst making the Split Programme programming event for [Ext Rec.] or [USB HDD Rec.], you cannot record any channels between the interrupted programmes.
  • The Split Programme programming event for Reminder will be cleared by pressing the OK button once to view.
  • The Split Programme programming event for Reminder will switch to the programmed channel by pressing the OK button even if it is between the interrupted programmes.
  • The Split Programme programming does not work if the separated parts are broadcast on different channels.

View advertisement (DVB or Analogue mode) UK only

Enter your postcode when using this function for the first time

[Guide Plus+ Postcode] in [TV Guide Settings] (p. 41)

If you have already entered your postcode in "Auto Setup"- when first using the TV (p. 13 - 16), you do not have to enter it again. If you enter an incorrect postcode for your area, or no postcode is entered, advertisements may not be displayed correctly.

Display advertisement information

OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display advertisement information - 1

• To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the information. To update the information continuously, the TV must be left in Standby mode.

■ To change advertisements
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display advertisement information - 2

■ To return to TV Guide
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display advertisement information - 3

Note

• Some advertisements are for future programmes.
In this case it is possible to use the Guide link programming function.
- The advertisements displayed on the TV Guide are sent from the GUIDE Plus+ system so that they cannot be deleted manually or will not be lost even when the TV is turned Off with Mains power On / Off switch.

(Other Sat. UK Satellite) Ireland

In Other Sat. or Satellite mode, TV Guide is not available. In stead, Channel List will appear.

• To tune in Other Sat. / Satellite Channels (p. 56)

In Other Sat. or Satellite mode, TV Guide is not available. In stead, Channel List will appear. • To tune in Other Sat. / Satellite Channels (p. 56)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (Other Sat. UK Satellite) Ireland - 1

text_image INPUT TV EXIT GUIDE OK

1

Select Other Sat.

→(p.18)

TV

2

Display the Channel List

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the Channel List - 1

To return to TV
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the Channel List - 2

3

Example: UK

All Other Sat. Channels

2 freesatHome

3 freesatSSU

4 Brit Shorts

5 HINRGLOWNRG

6 WELL Class

7 GROOVE

8

Select the channel

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the channel - 1

① select

②watch

Example: Ireland

Satellite Channel List

2 freesatHome

3 freesatSSU

4 Brit Shorts

5 HINRG LOWNRG

6 WELL Class

7 GROOVE

8

Viewing Teletext

You can enjoy news, weather forecasts and subtitles, etc. (depending on the broadcaster)

- The availability of teletext services for a programme is indicated by [TEXT] in the information banner.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Viewing Teletext - 1

text_image Information banner → (p. 19) PBC ONE WALES Construction Street 30/00 20/03 Phone # All 208 Churchs Selected Generation Displayed if programme has teletext service

Ireland

Depending on the broadcaster, the digital teletext (MHEG) services may not be available. In this case, the operation of the teletext services may be the same as the analogue teletext services (p. 28).

Digital teletext (MHEG)

Digital teletext services differ greatly from analogue teletext.

When you switch to a digital teletext service, the images you see can contain graphics and text, laid out and controlled in a manner decided by the broadcaster.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Digital teletext (MHEG) - 1

text_image 1 Select freesat or DVB → (p. 18) TV 2 Switch to Teletext TEXT • freesat and DVB programmes have teletext services (MHEG). Example :

■ How to operate services

In all cases, it is possible to navigate the pages using buttons on the remote control, but because the commands available must apply to all manufacturers of digital equipment, some on screen commands may not correspond exactly to the remote control buttons.

- Select,go

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate services - 1

- Back key

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate services - 2

- Symbol: ◀▶▶ ▲

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate services - 3

- Colouredcharacters

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate services - 4

Coloured button

- When options with numbers are displayed

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate services - 5

Note

  • As soon as you switch to a digital channel with links to a teletext service, software is downloaded in the background to enable the teletext function. This means that when switching to a digital channel, you should wait for approximately 5 seconds before pressing the TEXT button - this will allow the software to download. If you press the TEXT button before download is complete, it will be ignored and you will have to press the TEXT button again when the download is complete.
  • While navigating digital teletext, you will find there is a short delay when moving between pages while the page downloads. There is often a prompt shown somewhere on the page (for example "Loading") to let you know that this is happening.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 1

Analogue teletext

Analogue teletext services are the text information provided by the broadcasters.

The features may vary depending on the broadcasters.

What is FASTEXT (FLOF) mode?

In FASTEXT mode, four differently coloured subjects are situated at the bottom of the screen. To access more information about one of these subjects, press the appropriately coloured button. This facility enables fast access to information on the subjects shown.

What is List mode?

In List mode, four differently coloured page numbers are situated at the bottom of the screen. Each of these numbers can be altered and stored in the TV's memory. "Store frequently viewed pages" (p. 29)

■ To change modeletext] (p. 42)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - What is List mode? - 1

text_image Select Analogue (p. 18) TV Switch to Teletext TEXT Sub page number << 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 >> P100 17:51 28 Feb Time / date TELETEXT INFORMATION Colour bar Current page number Select the page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 or up down Coloured button (Corresponds to the colour bar) To adjust contrast MENU (Press twice) As the blue bar is displayed Viewing Teletext 1 2 3 EXIT

FULL / TOP / BOTTOM

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 3

(green)

(TOP) (BOTTOM) Normal (FULL)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - FULL / TOP / BOTTOM - 4

flowchart
graph LR
    A["P100 Broadcast"] --> B["Data Bus"]
    B --> C["P100 Broadcast"]

(Expand the TOP half) (Expand the BOTTOM half)

Reveal hidden data HOLD

Reveal hidden words e.g. quiz page answers Stop automatic updating

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Reveal hidden words e.g. quiz page answers Stop automatic updating - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Reveal hidden words e.g. quiz page answers Stop automatic updating - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Reveal hidden words e.g. quiz page answers Stop automatic updating - 3

(red)

- Press again to rehide (If you wish to hold the current page without updating)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Reveal hidden words e.g. quiz page answers Stop automatic updating - 4

- Press again to resume

INDEX Subtitles

Return to the main index page View a favourite page stored

INDEX

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Return to the main index page View a favourite page stored - 1

STTL

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Return to the main index page View a favourite page stored - 2

- Factory setting is "P888" (subtitle service) on the blue button (List mode).

View in multi window

Watch TV and Teletext in two windows at once

TEXT

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Watch TV and Teletext in two windows at once - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Watch TV and Teletext in two windows at once - 2

• Operations can be made only in Teletext screen.

• Each time pressed: Teletext-TV and Teletext

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Watch TV and Teletext in two windows at once - 3

Store frequently viewed pages

Store frequently viewed pages in the colour bar (List mode only)

As page is displayed

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Store frequently viewed pages in the colour bar (List mode only) - 1

(Corresponding coloured button)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Store frequently viewed pages in the colour bar (List mode only) - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Store frequently viewed pages in the colour bar (List mode only) - 3

press and hold

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Store frequently viewed pages in the colour bar (List mode only) - 4

text_image P100 Broadcast 101 200 400 888

The number changes to white.

- If you wish to use Subtitles, do not change number on blue button.

■ To change stored pages

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change stored pages - 1

Coloured button you want to change

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change stored pages - 2

Enter new page number

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change stored pages - 3
0

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change stored pages - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change stored pages - 5

press and hold

View sub page

View sub page (Only when teletext is more than one page)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - View sub page (Only when teletext is more than one page) - 1

<<010203 04 05

Appears at top of the screen

  • The number of sub pages varies depending on the broadcasters (up to 79 pages).
  • It may take some time for searching, during which time you can watch TV.

■ To view specific sub page

MENU

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To view specific sub page - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To view specific sub page - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To view specific sub page - 3

(blue)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To view specific sub page - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To view specific sub page - 5

Enter the 4-digit number example : P6

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To view specific sub page - 6

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To view specific sub page - 7

Watch TV while waiting for update

View the TV picture while searching for a teletext page

Teletext automatically updates itself when new information becomes available.

Changes to TV screen temporarily

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - View the TV picture while searching for a teletext page - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - View the TV picture while searching for a teletext page - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - View the TV picture while searching for a teletext page - 3

(yellow)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - View the TV picture while searching for a teletext page - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - View the TV picture while searching for a teletext page - 5

Appears when updating is completed

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - View the TV picture while searching for a teletext page - 6

View the updated page

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - View the TV picture while searching for a teletext page - 7

(yellow)

(You cannot change the channel.)

- The news page provides a function that indicates arrival of latest news ("News Flash").

Watching External Inputs

Connect the external equipment (VCRs, DVD equipment, etc.) and you can watch through the AV input.

• To connect the equipment (p.11, 12, 103 - 105)

The Remote Control is capable of operating some functions of selected external equipment.

→"Operating the equipment with the TV remote control" (p. 31)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Watching External Inputs - 1

text_image INPUT TV AV OK 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 0 REC PROGRAMME DVDVCR TV Panasonic TV

To return to TV TV

1

Turn the TV on

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Turn the TV on - 1

When connecting with SCART as example 2 or 3 (p. 11, 12)

Receives input signals automatically when playback starts

  • Input signals are automatically identified by the SCART (pin 8) terminal.
    • This function is also available for HDMI connections (p. 110).

If input mode is not switched automatically

Perform 2 and 3

- Check the setup of the equipment.

2

Display the input selection menu

AV

3

Select the input mode connected to the equipment

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the input mode connected to the equipment - 1

text_image Input Selection AV1 AV2 COMPONENT HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 TV SD Card/USB

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the input mode connected to the equipment - 2

  • You can also select the input using the AV button on the remote control or the side panel of the TV (except [SD Card/USB]).
    Press the button repeatedly until the desired input is selected.
    • [SD Card/USB] : Switches to Media Player → [Using Media Player] (p. 72)
  • You can label or skip each input mode (except [SD Card/USB]). ➞ "Input Labels" (p. 61) Skipped inputs will not be displayed when the AV button is pressed.

4

View

AV1 ____ Displays the selected mode

TerminalAV1 AV2 COMPONENT HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4
Manual input (default setting in "Input Labels")AV1 AV1-RGBAV2 COMPONENT HDMI1HDMI2 HDMI3HDMI4
Auto input (EC mode or VIERA Link)EC/AV1 EC/AV1-RGB--EC/HDMI1 Applicable for EC mode and VIERA LinkEC/HDMI2 Applicable for VIERA LinkEC/HDMI3 Applicable for VIERA Link

- If the above information is permanently displayed on the top left of the screen, press the i button to clear.

Note

  • If the external equipment has an aspect adjustment function, set it to [16:9].
  • For details, see the manual of the equipment or ask your local dealer.

Operating the equipment with the TV remote control

The equipment connected to the TV can be directly operated with the below buttons of this TV remote control.

DVD/PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 1Selection Switch for operating the connected equipmentSelect "DVD/VCR" to operate Panasonic DVD Recorder, DVD Player, Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or VCR→“How to change the code for the type of the equipment” (see below)Select "TV" to use USB HDD Recording, Media Player or VIERA Link→“USB HDD Recording” (p. 71)→“Media Player” (p. 79, 81)→“VIERA Link Control” (p. 101)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 2StandbySet to Standby mode / Turn on
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 3PlayPlayback videocassette / DVD / video content
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 4StopStop the operations
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 5Rewind / Skip / SearchVCR :Rewind, view the picture rapidly in reverseDVD / video content :Skip to the previous track, title or chapterPress and hold to search backward
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 6Fast-forward / Skip / SearchVCR :Fast-forward, view the picture rapidly forwardDVD / video content :Skip to the next track, title or chapterPress and hold to search forward
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 7PausePause / ResumeDVD : Press and hold to play at slow speed
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 8Channel Up / DownSelect channel
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operating the equipment with the TV remote control - 9RecordStart recording

How to change the code for the type of the equipment

Each type of the Panasonic equipment has its own remote control code.

Please change the code according to the equipment you want to operate.

1 Set the position to "DVD/VCR"

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set the position to "DVD/VCR" - 1

2 Press and hold during the following operations

Enter the appropriate code, see table below

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Press and hold during the following operations - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Press and hold during the following operations - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Press and hold during the following operations - 3

Type of the equipment Code
DVD Recorder, DVD Player, Blu-ray Disc Player 70 (default)
Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre 71
VCR 72

Note

  • Confirm if the remote control works correctly after changing the code.
  • The codes may be reset to default values if batteries are replaced.
  • Some operations may not be possible on some equipment models.

Viewing3Dimages

You can enjoy viewing 3D images with contents or programmes corresponding to the 3D effect by wearing the 3D Eyewear.

→ "Optional accessories" (p. 6)

This TV supports [Frame Sequential]*1, [Side by Side]*2 and [Top and Bottom]*3 3D formats.

*1 : The 3D format that the images for the left and right eyes are recorded with the high definition quality and alternately played back
*2, *3 : Other available 3D formats
• How to view the 3D images (see below)

Caution

To enjoy 3D images safely and comfortably, please read these instructions fully.

Viewing 3D Content

  • Do not use the 3D Eyewear if you have a history of oversensitivity to light, heart problems, or have any other existing medical conditions.
  • Please stop using the 3D Eyewear immediately, if you feel tired, are not feeling well or experience any other uncomfortable sensation.
  • When you set the effect by using [3D Adjustment], take into account that the vision of 3D images varies among different individuals.

• Take an appropriate break after viewing a 3D movie.

- Take a break of between 30 - 60 minutes after viewing 3D content on interactive devices such as 3D games or computers.

- Be careful not to strike the TV screen or other people unintentionally. When using the 3D Eyewear the distance between the user and screen can be misjudged.

- The 3D Eyewear must only be worn when viewing 3D content.

- If you do not look toward the TV screen for a while when viewing 3D images, the 3D Eyewear may be turned off automatically.

- If you suffer from any eyesight problems (short / far-sighted, astigmatism, eyesight differences in left and right), please ensure to correct your vision before using the 3D Eyewear.

- Stop using the 3D Eyewear if you can clearly see double images when viewing 3D content.

- Do not use the 3D Eyewear at a distance less than the recommended distance.

The recommended viewing distance is at least 3 times of image height.

TX-P42GT30B : 1.6 m or more

TX-P46GT30B : 1.7 m or more

TX-P50GT30B : 1.9 m or more

When the top and bottom area of the screen is blackened, such as movies, view the screen at a distance at least 3 times further than the height of the actual image. (That makes the distance closer than above recommended figure.)

3D Eyewear Use

  • Pay special attention when children are using the 3D Eyewear.
    3D Eyewear should not be used by children younger than about 5 - 6 years old, as a guideline. All children must be fully supervised by parents or guardians who must ensure their safety and health throughout the using 3D Eyewear.
  • Before using the 3D Eyewear, ensure no breakable objects surrounding the user to avoid any accidental damage or injury.
  • Remove the 3D Eyewear before moving around to avoid falling or accidental injury.
  • Always store the 3D Eyewear in the case supplied with the 3D Eyewear when not in use.
  • Use the 3D Eyewear only for the intended purpose and nothing else.
  • Do not use 3D Eyewear in the condition of high temperature.
  • Do not use if the 3D Eyewear is physically damaged.
  • Do not use any devices that emit the infrared signals near the 3D Eyewear, as this may cause the 3D Eyewear false operations.
  • Do not use devices (such as mobile phones or personal transceivers) that emit strong electromagnetic waves near the 3D Eyewear as this may cause the 3D Eyewear to malfunction.
  • Do not expose the infra-red receiver section to bright light such as direct sunshine and fluorescent light. The 3D image may not be displayed correctly.
  • Stop using the 3D Eyewear immediately if a malfunction or fault occurs.
  • Stop using the 3D Eyewear immediately if you experience any redness, pain, or skin irritation around the nose or temples.
  • In rare cases, the materials used in the 3D Eyewear may cause an allergic reaction.

To view the 3D images

You can enjoy the 3D images in a variety of ways.

(Frame Sequential, Side by Side and Top and Bottom are the supported 3D format.)

■ Playing back 3D-compatible Blu-ray disc (Frame Sequential format)

  • Connect the 3D-compatible player via a fully wired HDMI compliant cable.
  • If input mode is not switched automatically, select the input mode connected to the player. (p. 30)
  • If you use the non 3D-compatible player, the images will be displayed on 2D mode.

■ 3D-supportedbroadcast

- Please consult the suppliers of contents or programmes for availability of this service.

■ 3D photos and 3D videos taken by 3D-compatible Panasonic products

• Available in Media Player (p. 73 - 75, 78, 79) and Network services (p. 92)

■ 2D images converted to 3D

Set to [2D-3D] mode in [3D Mode Selection] (p. 34)

1 Turn the 3D Eyewear on

2 Put on the 3D Eyewear

3 Watch the 3D images

- Safety precautions will be displayed when you first watch the 3D image. Select [Yes] or [No] to continue to view 3D images. If you select [Yes], this message will be displayed again in the same condition after Mains power On / Off switch is next turned On. Select [No] if you do not wish to display this message again.

Example:

SafetyPrecautions

To enjoy 3D images safely and comfortably, please read the Operating Instructions fully.

Please stop using the 3D Eyewear immediately, if you feel tired, are not feeling well or experience any other uncomfortable sensation.

Always put the 3D Eyewear in the case provided after use.

Would you like to display this message again later?

Yes

4 Turn off the 3D Eyewear after using it

Note

• 3D Eyewear is not included. Please purchase as necessary. (p. 6)
- For more detail about using and wearing the 3D Eyewear, please refer to the manual of the 3D Eyewear.
- The 3D image or 3D effect may not be available while VIERA Connect home screen (p. 17) is displayed or Ext Rec. of Timer Programming (p. 59) / Direct TV Recording (p. 97, 99) is in progress. As for the contents of the Frame Sequential format and Side by Side (Full), no images will be displayed in these conditions.
- If the room is lit by fluorescent lights / dimmers (50 Hz) and light appears to flicker when using the 3D Eyewear, switch off the fluorescent light or set [3D Refresh Rate] to [100Hz] (p.39).
- 3D content will not be correctly visible if the 3D Eyewear is worn upside down or back-to-front.
- Do not wear the 3D Eyewear when watching anything other than 3D images. Liquid crystal displays (such as computer screens, digital clocks or calculators, etc.) may be difficult to see while wearing the 3D Eyewear.
- Do not use the 3D Eyewear as sunglasses.
- 3D effects may be perceived differently depending on the person.

Available range for the 3D Eyewear

If the 3D Eyewear is placed outside the coverage area for about 5 minutes, the 3D Eyewear will be turned off automatically.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Available range for the 3D Eyewear - 1

text_image 35°35°

View from the top

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Available range for the 3D Eyewear - 2

text_image 20° 20°

View from the side

: Coverage area for using the 3D Eyewear

Note

  • You cannot view the 3D images with the 3D Eyewear too far from the TV, because of the difficulty of receiving infrared signals from the TV.
  • The range may be shortened depending on the obstacles between the infrared sensors on the TV and the 3D Eyewear, the dirt on the infrared sensors or the surrounding environment.
  • If you do not look toward the TV screen for a while when viewing 3D images, the 3D Eyewear may be turned off automatically even if in the coverage area.

Changing 2D - 3D mode

You can easily change the viewing mode between 2D and 3D using the 3D button.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Changing 2D - 3D mode - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Changing 2D - 3D mode - 2

Select the mode

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Changing 2D - 3D mode - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Changing 2D - 3D mode - 4

- Items of [3D Mode Selection] vary depending on the condition.

[3D] / [2D] / [2D→3D]:

Displays the appropriate image that you desire without selecting 3D format

- This mode may not work properly depending on the source image format. In this case, select the appropriate 3D format manually.

■ To change 3D format manually

When the image is not changed properly using [3D], [2D] or [2D-3D] mode, use this manual setting.

During the above operation Select the mode

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change 3D format manually - 1

(red)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change 3D format manually - 2

3D Mode Selection (Manual)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change 3D format manually - 3

text_image Original Frame Sequential - 3D Frame Sequential - 2D Side by Side - 3D Side by Side - 2D Top and Bottom - 3D Top and Bottom - 2D 2D-3D

[Original]:

Displays the source image as it is

- Use to identify the format type of the source image.

"Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format" (see below)

[Frame Sequential - 3D] / [Frame Sequential - 2D] / [Side by Side - 3D] / [Side by Side - 2D] /

[Top and Bottom - 3D] / [Top and Bottom - 2D]:

Displays the mode you select

• Not valid on Analogue and AV mode

[2D→3D]:

Converts 2D images into 3D

  • For DVB, Analogue, AV, Component, HDMI, Media Player and network service operations
  • On-screen displays are also seen in 3D in this mode.
  • Please note the 3D images appear slightly different from the originals.
  • Using this function for profit-making purposes, or publicly showing images converted from 2D to 3D in places such as shops or hotels etc. may infringe on the rights of the copyright holder protected under copyright law.

Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format

If the picture appears to be abnormal, refer to the table below to choose the correct 3D mode.

Source image format 3D Mode Selection [Original][Frame Sequential - 3D][Side by Side - 3D][Top and Bottom - 3D] [2D 3D]
Frame SequentialPANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 1PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 2Normal 3D^*1 PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 3PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 4PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 5
Side by Side (Full)PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 6PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 7PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 8Normal 3D^*1 PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 9PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 10
Side by SidePANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 11PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 12PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 13Normal 3D^*1 PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 14PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 15
Top and BottomPANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 16PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 17PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 18PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 19Normal 3D^*1 PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 20
Normal format (2D)PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 21PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 22PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 23PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 24PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Table of images that can be seen for each [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] and the source image format - 25Normal 3D

*1: When selecting [Frame Sequential - 2D], [Side by Side - 2D] or [Top and Bottom - 2D], the images will be displayed without 3D effect.
- Depending on the player or broadcasts, the image may be different from the above illustrations.

3D Settings

If the 3D images are not displayed correctly or seem unusual, please adjust and setup the 3D settings.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 3D Settings - 1

text_image MENU EXIT OK

1

Display the menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu - 1

2

Select [Picture]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Picture] - 1

text_image VIERA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Picture] - 2

① select ② access

3

Select [3D Settings]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [3D Settings] - 1

text_image P-NR Off 3D Settings Access Screen Display On Advanced Settings Reset to Defaults

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [3D Settings] - 2

① select ② access

4

Select one of the following functions and set

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the following functions and set - 1

text_image 3D Settings 2D 3D Depth Mid 3D Adjustment Access Picture Sequence Normal Edge Smoother Off 3D Detection On 3D Signal Message On Safety Precautions Access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the following functions and set - 2

select adjust access / store

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the following functions and set - 3

Item Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
2D 3D DepthSelects a level of 3D-image depth for viewing converted 2D images [Min] / [Mid] / [Max]
3D AdjustmentAdjustment of the 3D effect (except in [2D→3D] mode) [Off] / [On]Set to [On] to enable [Effect] setting.When setting to [On], a safety precaution message will appear. Read it carefully and then press the BACK/RETURN button to go to [Effect] setting.[Effect]: Adjust the 3D depth according to the contents or to your preference.
Picture SequenceSelect [Reverse] if you feel that the sense of depth is unusual (except in [2D→3D] mode)[Normal] / [Reverse]
Edge SmootherSet to [On] if you feel the contoured parts of an image are not smooth enough (except in [2D→3D] mode) [Off] / [On]
3D DetectionAutomatically detects the 3D format signals / the images that can be converted to the 3D and displays the selectable mode [Off] / [On] / [On (Advance)][On (Advance)]: Detects the 3D format signals and the images that can be converted to the 3D [On]: Detects the 3D format signals
3D Signal MessageSelects whether to give a notification message when a signal of 3D format is found [Off] / [On]For DVB, Component and HDMIThis function is not available when [3D Detection] is set to [On (Advance)].
Safety PrecautionsDisplays the precautions for viewing 3D images.

Note

• [3D Adjustment] and [Picture Sequence] will not be memorized when changing the input mode or channel.

How to Use VIERA TOOLS

You can access some special features easily by using the VIERA TOOLS function.

  • For [VIERA Link Control] and [Pause Live TV] functions to operate correctly, ensure the connections and settings are completed.
    "Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features" (p. 95, 96), "Preparations" (p. 98)
    After connection, turn the equipment on and then switch the TV on.
  • For [Photo], [Video] and [Music] functions to operate correctly, ensure the device has photo or video data on it and insert it into the SD Card slot or USB port properly.
    → "Using Media Player" (p. 72)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to Use VIERA TOOLS - 1

EXIT

or

1

Display icons of the feature

2

Select a feature

① select ② access

■ Follow the operations of each feature

[VIERA Link Control]

→ "VIERA Link Control" (p. 100)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Follow the operations of each feature - 1

When two or more compatible equipment are connected, a selection screen will be displayed. Please select the correct description and access.

[Recorded TV]*

→ "Recorded TV mode" (p. 80)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Follow the operations of each feature - 2

[Photo]*

→ "Photo mode" (p. 73)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Follow the operations of each feature - 3

[Music]*

→ "Music mode" (p. 82)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Follow the operations of each feature - 4

[Video]*

→ "Video mode" (p. 78)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Follow the operations of each feature - 5

[Media Server]*

→ "Using DLNA® features" (p. 91)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Follow the operations of each feature - 6

* When two or more available devices are connected, a selection screen will be displayed. Please select the correct description and access.

Note

- If the selected feature is not available, the demonstration to explain how to use it can be displayed. Press the OK button to view the demonstration after selecting the unavailable feature.

How to Use Menu Functions

Various menus allow you to make settings for the picture, sound, and other functions.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to Use Menu Functions - 1

text_image MENU EXIT OK BACKI RETURN Panasonic TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to Use Menu Functions - 2

Display the menu

MENU • Displays the functions that can be set (varies according to the input signal)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu - 1

Select the menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the menu - 1

text_image VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the menu - 2

① select

② access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the menu - 3

Select the item

Example : [Picture Menu]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the item - 1

text_image Viewing Mode Dynamic Contrast Brightness Colour Sharpness Tint Colour Balance Warm Vivid Colour Off C.A.T.S. Off

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the item - 2

① select

② access

■ Choose from among alternatives

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Choose from among alternatives - 1

text_image Colour Balance Cool Normal Warm

■ Adjust using the slide bar

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Adjust using the slide bar - 1

■ Go to the next screen

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Go to the next screen - 1

■ To reset the settings

• To reset the picture settings only
[Reset to Defaults] in the Picture Menu (p. 39)
• To reset the sound settings only
→ [Reset to Defaults] in the Sound Menu (p. 40)
• To initialise all settings
→ [Shipping Condition] in the Setup Menu (p. 62)

To return to TV at any time

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To return to TV at any time - 1

To return to the previous screen

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To return to the previous screen - 1

To change menu pages

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To change menu pages - 1

■ Enter characters by free input menu You can enter names or numbers freely for some items.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Enter characters by free input menu You can enter names or numbers freely for some items. - 1

text_image User input Name A 8 C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U v W x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 : a a b c d e f g h l j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z i + - . * 1 2 3 4 5 6 y 7 8 9 RBS 0

Set characters

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Enter characters by free input menu You can enter names or numbers freely for some items. - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Enter characters by free input menu You can enter names or numbers freely for some items. - 3

Store

BACK!

RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Enter characters by free input menu You can enter names or numbers freely for some items. - 4

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

→ "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 110)

Note

- If "Demo Settings" item is displayed in the Setup Menu, the TV is in "Shop" viewing environment. To return to "Home" viewing environment initialise all settings by accessing Shipping Condition. (p. 62)

Menu list

MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
PictureViewing ModeBasic picture mode [Dynamic] / [Normal] / [Cinema] / [THX (True Cinema)] / [Game] / [Photo] / [Professional1] / [Professional2]In each Viewing Mode, [Contrast], [Brightness], [Colour], [Sharpness], [Tint], [Colour Balance], [Vivid Colour], [C.A.T.S.], [P-NR] and [3D-COMB] can be adjusted and stored to suit your particular viewing requirement.Set for each input signal.[Dynamic]: Provides enhanced picture contrast and sharpness when viewing in a bright room.[Normal]: Recommended for viewing under normal ambient room lighting conditions.[Cinema]: For watching movies in a darkened room with the improved performance of contrast, black and colour reproduction[THX (True Cinema)]:Precisely reproduces the original quality of the image without any revision.Recommended for playback of THX disc (disc with [THX] logo)THX mode is used to mirror the picture settings used by professional filmmakers, faithfully reproducing the image quality of THX Certified movies.THX Certified movies have the [THX] logo on a disc.[True Cinema] is displayed instead of [THX] in the mode of Media Player and network service operations.[Game]: Fast response signal specifically to provide suitable images for playing gamesNot valid on TV modeA continuous record of time spent using Game mode can be displayed in the top right of the screen. [Playing Time Display] (p. 43)[Professional1 / 2]:Allows you to set the professional picture settings in [Advanced Settings], [Lock Settings] and [Copy Adjustment] (p. 67)This mode is available only when [Advance(isfccc)] in the Setup Menu is set to [On].Not valid on VIERA ConnectIf the certified professional dealer sets these modes, [Professional1] and [Professional2] may be displayed as [isf Day] and [isf Night].
Contrast, Brightness, Colour, SharpnessIncreases or decreases the levels of these options according to your personal preference
TintWith an NTSC signal source connected to the TV, the picture hue can be adjusted to suit your tasteFor NTSC signal reception only
Colour BalanceAllows you to set the overall colour tone of the picture [Cool] / [Normal] / [Warm]Not valid when [Viewing Mode] is set to [THX (True Cinema)], [Professional1] or [Professional2].
Vivid ColourAutomatically adjusts colours to vivid ones [Off] / [On]Not valid when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Professional1] or [Professional2].
Reversal Film EffectProvides the picture effect such as the reversal film [Off] / [On]This function is available when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Photo].
C.A.T.S.Contrast Automatic Tracking System (Automatic Brightness Control function)Adjusts picture settings automatically dependent on ambient lighting conditions [Off] / [On]Set to [On] to make the suitable contrast setting automatically. The default setting is [On] when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Normal].
P-NRPicture Noise ReductionAutomatically reduces unwanted picture noise and flicker noise in the contoured parts of a picture [Off] / [Min] / [Mid] / [Max]
3D-COMBMakes still or slow moving pictures look more vivid [Off] / [On]Occasionally, whilst viewing still or slow moving pictures, colour patterning may be seen. Set to [On] to display sharper and more accurate colours.For PAL or NTSC signal reception onlyNot valid on RGB, Component, HDMI and Media Player
3DSettings Adjusts andsets to view 3D images (p. 35)
Screen DisplayTurns the screen off when you select [Off] [Off] / [On]The sound is active even if the screen turns off.Press any buttons (except Standby) to turn the screen on.This function is effective in reducing power consumption when listening to the sound without watching the TV screen.
PictureAdvanced SettingsIntelligent Frame Creation
24p Smooth Film
Clear Cinema
3D Refresh Rate
Resolution Enhancer
Side Panel
16:9 Overscan
DVI Input Setting
Pixel Orbiter
Scrolling Bar
Reset to Defaults
SoundMode
Bass Increases or decreases level to enhance or minimise lower, deeper sound output
Treble
SoundEqualiserAdjusts the frequency level to suit your favourite sound qualityThis function is available when [Mode] is set to [User].Select the frequency and change the frequency level by using the cursor button.If you want to enhance the bass sound, raise the level of the lower frequency. If you want to enhance the treble sound, raise the level of the higher frequency.To reset the levels of each frequency to the default settings, select the [Reset to Defaults] by using the cursor button, and then press the OK button.
Balance Adjusts volume level of right and left speakers
Headphone Volume Adjusts the volume of the headphones
SurroundSurround sound settings [Off] / [V-Audio] / [V-Audio Surround][V-Audio] : Provides a dynamic enhancer of width to simulate improved spatial effects [V-Audio Surround] :Provides a dynamic enhancer of width and depth to simulate improved spatial effects
Auto Gain ControlAutomatically regulates large sound level differences between channels and inputs [Off] / [On]
Volume Correction Adjusts the volume of individual channel or input mode
Speaker Distance to WallCompensates for the distance between the speakers and the wall [Over 30cm] / [Up to 30cm]If the distance between the TV and wall is over 30 cm, [Over 30cm] is recommended.If the distance between the TV and wall is within 30 cm, [Up to 30cm] is recommended.
Preferred Multi AudioSelects the preferred language for digital channel multi audio (depending on the broadcaster) [English] / [Welsh] / [Gaelic] / [Irish]
NICAMNear Instantaneous Companded Audio MultiplexReproduces NICAM stereo sound [Off] / [On]Off if reception is poor (FM monaural sound)Analogue mode only
SPDIF SelectionSPDIF : A standard audio transfer file formatSelects the initial setting for digital audio output signal from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT and HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals [Auto] / [PCM][Auto] : Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital and HE-AAC (48 kHz) multi-channel are output as Dolby Digital Bitstream.MPEG is output as PCM.[PCM] : Digital output signal is fixed to PCM.For freesat, DVB mode, Other Sat / Satellite, network video contents (p. 92) or Video mode of Media Player (p. 78)ARC (Audio Return Channel) : A function of digital audio output using HDMI cable
HDMI1 / 2 / 3 / 4 InputSelect to fit the input signal [Digital] / [Analogue] (p. 110)[Digital] : When sound is carried via the HDMI cable connection[Analogue] : When sound is not carried via the HDMI cable connectionHDMI input mode only
Audio DescriptionUK onlyNarration settings for visually impaired users [Off] / [Auto]Set to [Auto] to activate the narration sound track when available on the broadcastThe availability of audio description sound track is indicated by [AD] in the information banner (p. 19).For freesat or DVB mode
VolumeUK onlyAdjusts the volume for Audio DescriptionDVB mode only
SpeakersUK onlySet to [On] to activate the description sound track from TV speakers [Off] / [On]DVB mode only
HeadphonesUK onlySet to [On] to activate the description sound track from headphones [Off] / [On]DVB mode only
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset the present Sound Mode, [Balance], [Headphone Volume] and [Surround] to the default settings
TimerTimer Programming Sets programme reminders and records forthcoming programmes (p. 58)
Off TimerSets the time until the TV automatically goes to Standby mode [Off] / [15] / [30] / [45] / [60] / [75] / [90] (minutes) (p. 20)
Auto StandbySets the duration of time that the TV will remain On when no operation is received from the user [Off] / [2] / [4] (hours)Starting Timer Programming automatically does not affect this function.Automatic input switching with the connected equipment affects this function and time-count will be reset.The notification message will appear 3 minutes before going to Standby mode.
SetupTV Guide SettingsTV Guide ViewChanges the layout of TV Guide [Normal] / [Full] / [Info][Normal]: Default TV Guide screen[Full]: Displays channels and programmes full-screen without the operation guide [Info]: Displays details of the selected programme at the bottom without the operation guide
GUIDE Plus+ PostcodeUK onlySets your postcode to display advertisements in the GUIDE Plus+ system (p. 25)Not valid on freesat mode
GUIDE Plus+ InformationUK onlyDisplays the system information of the GUIDE Plus+ systemNot valid on freesat mode
Eco NavigationAutomatically sets the TV to the most suitable energy-saving modeIf you press the OK button, the following items are set as below: [C.A.T.S.], [VIERA Link], [Standby Power Save], [Power Save]→[On][Intelligent Auto Standby]→[On (No reminder)][Auto Standby]→[2 hours]
Recording Setup Formats the connected USB HDD and sets the condition (p. 68)
Link SettingsVIERA LinkSettings for VIERA Link functions [Off] / [On] (p. 98)
HDMI Content DetectionAutomatically adjusts picture according to received HDMI content [Off] / [Auto]This function is available if the connected equipment supports HDMI Content Type.The content type information will be displayed for several seconds when this function works.
AV1 outChooses the signal to be transmitted from the TV to Q-Link [TV] / [AV2] / [Monitor][Monitor]: Image displayed on screenComponent and HDMI signals cannot be output.
Standby Power SaveControls the connected equipment to reduce power consumption in Standby [Off] / [On] (p. 99)This function is available when [VIERA Link] is set to [On].
Intelligent Auto StandbyMakes non-watched or non-used connected equipment go into Standby mode to reduce the power consumption [Off] / [On (With reminder)] / [On (No reminder)] (p. 99)This function is available when [VIERA Link] is set to [On].
Q-Link DownloadDownloads analogue channel information to a Q-Link compatible equipment connected to the TV
Child Lock Applies access control for channels or AV inputs to prevent unwanted access (p. 60)
MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
Setupfreesat Tuning MenuFavourites EditUK onlyCreates a list of favourite freesat channels (p. 50)
Channel ListUK onlySkips the unwanted freesat channels (p. 51)
Regional Channel EditUK onlyReplace your regional channels with available channels from another region (p. 51)
Auto SetupUK onlyAutomatically searches for the freesat channels received in the area (p. 48)
Signal ConditionUK onlyChecks the freesat signal condition (p. 51)
DVB Tuning MenuFavourites Edit Createsa list of favourite DVB channels (p. 53)
Channel List Skips the unwanted DVB channels or edits DVB channels (p. 54)
Auto Setup Automatically searches for the DVB channels received in the area (p. 49)
Channel Sorting by RegionUK onlyAutomatically sorts tuned channels according to the available region (p. 52)
Manual Tuning Searchesfor the DVB channels manually (p. 52)
Update Channel List Updates DVB Channel List while keeping your settings (p. 54)
New Channel MessageSearches for whether to give a notification message when a new DVB channel is found [Off] / [On] (p. 53)
Signal Condition Checksthe DVB signal condition (p. 53)
Analogue Tuning MenuChannel List Skips the unwanted Analogue channels or edits Analogue channels (p. 55)
Auto SetupAutomatically searches for the Analogue channels received in the area (p. 49)
Manual Tuning Searchesfor the Analogue channels manually (p. 55)
Satellite Tuning MenuFavourites Edit Createsa list of favourite Other Satellite channels (p. 57)
Channel ListSkips the unwanted Other Satellite channels or edits Other Satellite channels (p. 57)
Auto SetupAutomatically searches for the Other Satellite channels received in the area (p. 56)
Manual TuningSearches for the Other Satellite channels manually (p. 57)Please consult the received satellite broadcasting companies for the setting.
Add New Channels Adds new Other Satellite channels to Channel List (p. 57)
Signal Condition Checksthe condition of Other Satellite signals (p. 51)
Display SettingsTeletextAnalogue teletext display mode [FASTEXT] / [List] (p. 27)
Teletext Character SetIreland onlySelects teletext language font [West] / [East1] / [East2][West] : English, French, German, Greek, Italian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, etc.[East1] : Czech, English, Estonian, Lettish, Rumanian, Russian, Ukrainian, etc.[East2] : Czech, Hungarian, Lettish, Polish, Rumanian, etc.
Preferred TeletextIreland onlySelects the preferred language for digital channel teletext service (depending on the broadcaster) [English] / [Welsh] / [Gaelic] / [Irish]
Preferred SubtitlesSelects the preferred language for digital channel subtitles (depending on the broadcaster) [English] / [Welsh] / [Gaelic] / [Irish]To display subtitles ➔ (p. 21)provides aids in understanding and enjoyment with DVB subtitles (depending on the broadcaster).
MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
SetupDisplay SettingsInput Labels Labels or skips each input terminal (p. 61)
Banner DisplayTimeoutSets how long the Information banner (p. 19) stays on screen[0 (No display)] / [1] / [2] / [3] / [4] / [5] / [6] / [7] / [8] / [9] / [10] (seconds)
VIERA ConnectBannerSets the VIERA Connect introduction banner display [Off] / [On] (p. 17, 18)
Playing Time DisplaySet to [On] to display a continuous record of time spent using Game mode every 30 minutes [Off] / [On]This function is available when [Game] is selected in [Viewing Mode] (p. 38)
Radio ModeSets the timer for turning off the screen automatically when a radio channel is selected [Off] / [5] / [10] / [15] / [20] (seconds)The sound is active even if the screen turns off.Press any buttons except Standby, Volume Up / Down and Sound Mute buttons to turn the screen on.This function is effective in reducing power consumption when listening to a radio channel.
Network Setup Sets the network setting to use in your network environment (p. 86)
DivX® VOD Displays DivX VOD registration code (p. 108)
Advance(isfccc)Enables the advanced picture settings [Off] / [On]Set to [On] to enable the mode of [Professional1] and [Professional2] in [Viewing Mode].Set to [On] to display the advanced items in the Picture Menu - [Advanced Settings], [Lock Settings] and [Copy Adjustment]. [Copy Adjustment] will be displayed when [Viewing Mode] is set to [Professional1] or [Professional2].[isfccc] is the picture setting for the certified professional dealer. For details, consult your local dealer.
System MenuUSB KeyboardLayoutSelects the language that your USB Keyboard supportsFor the information of using USB Keyboard (p. 111)
Shipping Condition Resets all settings, for example, when moving house (p. 62)
Owner ID Inputs the owner ID (p. 63)
Common Interface Settings for watching encrypted channels (p. 64)
System Update Downloads new software to this TV (p. 65)
Software Licence Displays the software licence information
System Information Displays the system information of this TV
Other SettingsPower on PreferenceAutomatically selects the input when the TV is turned on [TV] / [AV]Set to [TV] to view picture from TV tuner.Set to [AV] to view input from an external equipment connected to a SCART terminal, e.g. cable TV box.The external equipment must be switched on and sending a control signal for automatic switching at power on to occur.
Power on Channel ListAutomatically selects All Channels or Favourites list in the Information banner (p. 19) when the TV is turned on [All Channel List] / [Last]Set to [All Channel List] to display all the channels.Set to [Last] to display the one you selected last time.Not available on freesat or analogue mode
USB Charge in StandbyEnables to supply the power from the USB terminal in Standby mode [Off] / [On]Available for charging 3D Eyewear (optional)This function is available when in Standby mode.
Power SaveReduces brightness of picture to economise on power consumption [Off] / [On]
  • A different menu will be displayed when [Advance(isfccc)] in the Setup Menu is set to [On] or in the mode of Media Player or network service operations. (p. 63, 72 - 83, 91 - 94)
  • Only available items can be selected.

Overview (Picture, Sound, Timer, Setup)

How to operate (p. 37)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Overview (Picture, Sound, Timer, Setup) - 1

flowchart VISA Main Menu interface showing settings for viewing mode, 3D and advanced settings, and audio configuration with date/time format.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Overview (Picture, Sound, Timer, Setup) - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Main Menu"] --> B["Setup"]
    B --> C["1/2 TV Guide Settings"]
    C --> D["Eco Navigation"]
    C --> E["Recording Setup"]
    C --> F["Link Settings"]
    C --> G["Child Lock"]
    C --> H["freesat Tuning Menu"]
    C --> I["DVB Tuning Menu"]
    C --> J["Analogue Tuning Menu"]
    C --> K["Other Sat. Tuning Menu"]
    D --> L["Access"]
    E --> M["Access"]
    F --> N["Access"]
    G --> O["Access"]
    H --> P["Access"]
    I --> Q["Access"]
    J --> R["Access"]
    K --> S["Access"]
    T["TV Guide Settings Menu"] --> U["Enter Postcode"]
    U --> V["Postcode: ABCEIGILKLNOPDRST<br>BYWXY20 2456789"]
    V --> W["(p. 41)"]
    X["Recording Setup"] --> Y["USB HDD Setup"]
    Y --> Z["Access"]
    Y --> AA["One Touch Recording"]
    Y --> AB["Rewind LIVE TV"]
    AB --> AC["(p. 68)"]
    AD["Child Lock-PIN Entry"] --> AE["Please enter new PIN"]
    AE --> AF["PIN"]
    AF --> AG["(p. 60)"]
    AH["Child Lock"] --> AI["Change PIN"]
    AI --> AJ["Access"]
    AK["Parental Rating"] --> AL["No limit"]
    AM["Available in DVB Ireland only"] --> AN["(p. 60)"]
    AO["Child Lock List - TV and AV"] --> AP["Type"]
    AP --> AQ["Lock"]

Overview (Setup)

How to operate (p. 37)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Overview (Setup) - 1

text_image VISA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup
freesat Tuning Menu
Favourites EditAccess
Channel ListAccess
Regional Channel EditAccess
Auto SetupAccess
Access

Available in freesat UK only (p. 48, 50, 51)

TV Guide Settings
Eco NavigationAccess
Recording SetupAccess
Link SettingsAccess
Child LockAccess
freesat Tuning MenuAccess
DVB Tuning MenuAccess
Analogue Tuning MenuAccess
Other Sat. Tuning MenuAccess
Satellite Tuning Menu
Display SettingsAccess
Network SetupAccess
DivX®VODAccess
Advance(isfccc)Off
AccessSystem Menu
AccessOther Settings

(p. 41 - 43)

DVB Tuning Menu
Favourites EditAccess
Channel ListAccess
Auto SetupAccess
Channel Sorting by RegionAccess
Manual TuningAccess
Update Channel ListAccess
New Channel MessageOn
Signal ConditionAccess

Available in DVB (p. 49, 52 - 54)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Overview (Setup) - 2

text_image DVB Update Channel List Progress CH 21 cu This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channel Name Type Quality Free TV: 0 Pay TV: 0 Data: 0Radio: 0 Searching

(p. 54)

Other Settings
Power on PreferenceTV
Power on Channel ListLast
USB Charge in StandbyOff
Off Power Save

(p. 43)

Analogue Tuning Menu
Channel ListAccess
Auto SetupAccess
Manual TuningAccess

Available in Analogue (p. 49, 54, 55)

System Menu

USB Keyboard LayoutEnglish(UK)
Shipping ConditionAccess
Owner IDAccess
Common InterfaceAccess
System UpdateAccess
Software LicenceAccess
System InformationAccess

(p. 43)

System Update

Auto Update Search in StandbyOff
System Update Search NowAccess

(p. 65)

Common Interface

Slot 1:Module inserted

Available in DVB or Other Sat. (p. 64)

Owner ID
Please enter new PIN

PIN****

(p. 63)

Shipping Condition

All tuning data will be erased

Are you sure?

Are you sure?

(p. 62)

Example: UK

Other Satellite Tuning Menu

Access Auto Setup
Manual TuningAccess
Add New ChannelsAccess
Signal ConditionAccess

Available in Other Sat. UK /

Satellite Ireland (p. 56, 57)

Network Setup

Connection TestAccess
Network Type
Access Point SettingsConnected
IP/DNS SettingsAccess
Network Link SettingsAccess
Software UpdateAccess
MAC Addressab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

(p. 86)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 1

text_image freesat Auto Setup Searching Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 TV Channels Found 8 Radio Channels Found 2 Data Channels Found 1 Channels found, creating channel list.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 2

text_image freesat Channel List 101 BBC 1 Scotland 102 BBC 2 Scotland 103 stv 104 stv 108 BBC THREE 109 BBC FOUR 110 BBC HD

(p. 48)
(p. 51)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 3

text_image freesat Favourites Editor All freesat Channels Favourites1 1 BBC One Wales 7 BBC THREE 14 E4 CBBC Channel70 72 Cartoon Nwk 105 BBCI 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cymru

(p. 50)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 4

text_image DVB Manual Tuning Frequency [CH21] 474.00 MHz Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 No. Channel Name Type New Free TV: 0 Pay TV: 0 Data: 0Radio: 0 Stopped

(p. 52)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 5

text_image All DVB Channels ✓ 70 CBBC Channel ✓ 72 Cartoon Nwk ✓ 105 BBCi ○ 719 BBC Radio Wales □ 720 BBC Radio Cymru ○ 1 BBC ONE Wales ✓ 7 BBC THREE

(p. 54)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 6

text_image DVB Favourites Editor All DVB Channels Favourites 1 BBC One Wales 7 BBC THREE 14 E4 CBBC Channel70 72 Cartoon Nvik 105 BBCI 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cymru

(p. 53)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 7

text_image Channel Sorting by Region GRR> Best signal quality (All Regions) England Regions> Region choice available

(p. 52)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 8

text_image DVB Auto Setup Progress CH 21:00 This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channel Name Type Quality 62 CBBC Channel Free TV 10 62 BBC Radio Wales Free TV 10 62 E4 Free TV 10 62 10 cartoon Nwk Free TV Free TV: 4 Pay TV: 0 Data: 0Radio: 0 Searching

(p. 49)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 9

text_image Analogue Manual Tuning Manual Tuning 21 Store CH331 BB

(p. 55)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 10

text_image Analogue Auto Setup Scan CH21 This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channel Name 29 30 Analogue: 2 Searching

(p. 49)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 11

text_image Analogue Channel List 1 BBC1 2 ***** 3 ***** 4 ***** 5 ***** 6 ***** 7 *****

(p. 55)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 12

text_image Other Satellite Add New Channels - Satellite Selection Satellite Selection Astra2/Eurobird Continue freesat and other channels Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 Signal Lock Locked

(p. 57)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 13

text_image Other Satellite Manual Tuning Transponder Frequency 10773 Polarisation Horizontal Symbol Rate (Ksym/s) Auto Start Scan

(p. 57)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 14

text_image Other Satellite Auto Setup Satellite Astra 2/Eurobird Progress 0% This may take up to 20 minutes. No. Channel Name Type Quality 1 BBC 1 East (W) Free TV 10 2 BBC 1 CI Free TV 10 3 BBC HD Free TV 10 4 6 Free TV 10 9 Free TV: 4 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Searching

(p. 56)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 15

text_image Display Settings Teletext FASTEXT Teletext Character Set West Preferred Teletext Irish Preferred Subtitles English Input Labels Access Banner Display Timeout 3 seconds VIERA Connect Banner On Playing Time Display On Radio Mode Off

(p. 42, 43)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 16

text_image Available in Analogue Ireland only Available in DVB Ireland only Available in freesat, DVB or Other Sat. / Satellite

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example: UK - 17

text_image Input Labels AV1 DVD AV2 AV2 COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMI1 HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI3 HDMI4 HDMI4 freesat freesat Satellite Satellite
Input Labels2/2
DVBDVB
AnalogueAnalogue
Other Sat.Other Sat.

(p. 61)

Retuning from Setup Menu

Automatically retune the channels received in the area.

  • This function is available if channel tuning is already performed.
  • Only the selected mode is retuned. All the previous tuning settings are erased.
  • If Child Lock PIN number (p. 60) has been set, the PIN number is required.
  • If tuning has not been done completely [Manual Tuning] (p. 52, 55)

freesat channels UK only

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - freesat channels UK only - 1

text_image INPUT TV MENU EXIT OK

To return to TV
EXIT

For Auto Setup, using the buttons on the side panel of the TV (p. 11)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - freesat channels UK only - 2

1 Press repeatedly until [Auto Setup] appears
2 Access [Auto Setup] TV
3 Start [Auto Setup]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - freesat channels UK only - 3

natural_image Illustration of a flat-screen monitor and a connected screen with buttons (no text or symbols)

• To return to TV
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - freesat channels UK only - 4

1 Select freesat

→(p.18)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select freesat - 1

2 Display the menu

MENU

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu - 1

3 Select [Setup]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 1

text_image VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 2

4 Select [freesat Tuning Menu]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [freesat Tuning Menu] - 1

text_image freesat Tuning Menu Access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [freesat Tuning Menu] - 2

- The displayed item depends on the selected mode.

5 Select [Auto Setup]

Example :

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Auto Setup] - 1

text_image freesat Tuning Menu Auto Setup Access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Auto Setup] - 2

6 Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically)

freesat Auto Setup

All freesat tuning data will be erased

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically) - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically) - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically) - 3

text_image freesat Auto Setup Searching Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 TV Channels Found 8 Radio Channels Found 2 Data Channels Found 1 Channels found, creating channel list

7 Enter your postcode

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter your postcode - 1

text_image Enter Postcode for local channels including space Postcode A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 3 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6

Your postcode is required to receive local services and sort the channel order. Please ensure to include a space when entering your postcode.

Set characters

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter your postcode - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter your postcode - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter your postcode - 4

(green)

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 110)

When the operation is completed, the channel at the lowest position will be displayed.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter your postcode - 5

text_image INPUT TV MENU EXIT OK Panasonic TV

to return to TV EXIT

For Auto Setup, using the buttons on the side panel of the TV (p. 11)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter your postcode - 6

text_image 1 Press repeatedly until [Auto Setup] appears F 2 Access [Auto Setup] TV 3 Start [Auto Setup] TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter your postcode - 7

text_image • To return to TV F

1 Select DVB or Analogue

→(p.18)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select DVB or Analogue - 1

2 Display the menu

MENU

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu - 1

3 Select [Setup]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 1

text_image VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 2

4. Select [DVB Tuning Menu] or [Analogue Tuning Menu]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [DVB Tuning Menu] or [Analogue Tuning Menu] - 1

text_image DVB Tuning Menu Access Analogue Tuning Menu Access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [DVB Tuning Menu] or [Analogue Tuning Menu] - 2

- The displayed item depends on the selected mode.

5 Select [Auto Setup]

Example :

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Auto Setup] - 1

text_image DVB Tuning Menu Auto Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Auto Setup] - 2

6 Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically)

Example : DVB

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically) - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically) - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically) - 3

text_image DVB Auto Setup Progress CH 21 68 This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channel Name Type Quality 62 CBBC Channel Free TV 10 62 BBC Radio Wales Free TV 10 62 E/I Free TV 10 62 Cartoon Nmk Free TV 10 Free TV: 4 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Data: 0 Searching

Example : Analogue

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically) - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically) - 5

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Auto Setup (Settings are made automatically) - 6

text_image Analogue Auto Setup Scan CH 21 68 This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channel Name 29 30 Analogue: 2 Searching

- The analogue settings are downloaded to a Q-Link compatible equipment connected to the TV in Analogue mode.

When the operation is completed, the channel at the lowest position will be displayed.

Tuning and Editing Channels

(freesat) UK only

You can retune channels or make your favourite channel lists, skip unwanted channels, etc.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (freesat) UK only - 1

text_image 1 Select freesat → (p. 18) TV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select [Setup] VIEFA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access 4 Select [freesat Tuning Menu] #1 select #2 access

freesat Tuning Menu

#1 select #2 access 5 Select one of the following functions

Freesat Tuning Menu

Favourites Edit Access Channel List Access Regional Channel Edit Access Auto Setup Access

auto Setup "Retuning from Setup

Menu" (p. 48) EXIT

List favourite freesat channels [Favourites Edit]

Create your favourite channel list from various broadcasters.

The freesat Favourites list is available for switching from [Channel Genre] in the TV Guide screen (p. 22).

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - List favourite freesat channels [Favourites Edit] - 1

text_image 1 Select a channel to list (○: Encrypted channel) freesat Favourites Editor freesat Channels Favourites 1 BBC One Wales 7 BBC THREE 14 E4 70 CBBC Channel 72 Cartoon Nwk 105 BBCI 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cymru select

2 Add it to the Favourites list
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - List favourite freesat channels [Favourites Edit] - 2

text_image freesat Favourites Editor freesat Channels 1 BBC One Wales 7 BBC THREE 14 E4 70 CBBC Channel 72 Cartoon Nwk 105 BBCI 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cymru

• To add all channels to the list (yellow)

■ To edit Favourites list

While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit

• To delete a channel

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit - 1

① select

② delete

• To move the channel

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit - 2

(green)

• To delete all channels

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit - 3

(yellow)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit - 4

Select the new position

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit - 5

or

Select the turn

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit - 6

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit - 7

Store

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit - 8

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit - 9

flowchart
graph TD
    A["To name the Favourites (red)"] --> B["Set characters (maximum: ten characters) Store"]
    B --> C["Back/RETURN"]
    D["3 Store"] --> E["Back/RETURN"]
    F["User input"] --> G["1 select"]
    F --> H["2 set"]
    I["3 Store"] --> J["Back/RETURN"]
    K["Set character (maximum: ten characters) Store"] --> L["OK"]
    M["To use numeric buttons → “Characters table for numeric buttons” (p. 110)"]

Skip unwanted freesat channels [Channel List]

You can hide unwanted freesat channels.

The hidden channels cannot be displayed except in this function. Use this function to skip unwanted channels.

Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide] - 1

text_image freesat Channel List 101 BBC 1 Scotland 102 BBC 2 Scotland 103 stv 104 stv 108 BBC THREE 109 BBC FOUR 110 BBC HD

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide] - 2

text_image ① select ② [reveal] / [hide] ✓ : [reveal] □ : [hide] (skip)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide] - 3

Replace the regional channels [Regional Channel Edit]

You can replace some regional channels with the available channels from another region channel. (if available)

1 Select the channel you want to replace

freesat Regional Channels Editor
freesat Regional Channels Alternative Regional Channels
101 BBC 1 London101 BBC 1 Scotland
102 BBC 2 England101 BBC 1 Wales
101 BBC 1 East

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the channel you want to replace - 1

2 Select the channel to be replaced

freesat Regional Channels Editor
freesat Regional Channels Alternative Regional Channels
101 BBC 1 London 102 BBC 2 England101 BBC 1 Scotland 101 BBC 1 Wales 101 BBC 1 East

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the channel to be replaced - 1

Check freesat signal [Signal Condition]

Selects a channel and checks the freesat signal condition.

A good Signal Strength is not an indication of best signal for freesat reception.

Please use the Signal Quality indicator as follows :

[Signal Quality]:

Green bar Good
Yellow bar Poor
- Red bar - Bad (Check the Satellite dish)

Example :

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Example : - 1

text_image freesat Signal Condition Channel Name 70 CBBC Channel Signal Quality 0 9 Signal Strength 0 8 Bit Error Rate 0.00E+100 Network Name Wenwoe Frequency 802.00 MHz, 64 QAM, 6945 kV

• To change the channel

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - • To change the channel - 1

These bars show the maximum signal value of the selected channel.

(DVB)

You can retune channels or make your favourite channel lists, skip unwanted channels, etc.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (DVB) - 1

text_image 1 Select DVB → (p. 18) TV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select [Setup] VIEFA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access 4 Select [DVB Tuning Menu] DVB Tuning Menu ① select ② access 5 Select one of the following functions DVB Tuning Menu Favourites Edit Access Channel List Access Auto Setup Access Channel Sorting by Region Access Manual Tuning Access Update Channel List Access New Channel Message On Signal Condition Access #to return to TV EXIT [Auto Setup] "Re" M

Sort DVB channels according to the region [Channel Sorting by Region] UK only

You can sort DVB channels so that those with the best signal quality, or those for your preferred region, appear nearer the top of your Channel List.

Normally, you should select [Best signal quality (All Regions)].

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Sort DVB channels according to the region [Channel Sorting by Region] UK only - 1

text_image Channel Sorting by Region GBR> Best signal quality (All Regions) England Regions> Region choice available

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Sort DVB channels according to the region [Channel Sorting by Region] UK only - 2

(select repeatedly until you reach the available region)

- If you choose to select your preferred region, you could find channels with a weaker signal appear nearer the top of your Channel List. If you have any image or sound problems, select [Best signal quality (All Regions)] instead.

Set DVB channel manually [Manual Tuning]

Normally use [Auto Setup] or [Update Channel List] to retune DVB channels.

If tuning has not been done completely or for adjusting the direction of the aerial, use this function.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set DVB channel manually [Manual Tuning] - 1

text_image DVB Manual Tuning Frequency CH21 474.00 MHz Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 No Channel Name Type New FreeTV: 0 PayTV: 0 Radio: 0 Data: 0 Stopped

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set DVB channel manually [Manual Tuning] - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set DVB channel manually [Manual Tuning] - 3

text_image Ireland 1 Adjust frequency for each channel ① select channel ② adjust frequency 2 Search

- Set where the level of [Signal Quality] becomes the maximum.

- All channels found will be added to the Channel List.

List favourite DVB channels [Favourites Edit]

Create your favourite channel lists from various broadcasters (up to 4: [Favourites]1 to 4).

The DVB Favourites lists are available for switching in the Information banner (p. 19) and from [Category] in the TV Guide screen (p. 22).

1 Select a channel to list (→: Encrypted channel)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - List favourite DVB channels [Favourites Edit] - 1

text_image DVB Favourites Editor All DVB Channels Favourites1 1 BBC One Wales 7 BBC THREE 14 E4 CBS Channel70 72 Cartoon Nwk 10s BBC1 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cymru select To display other Favourites (green)

2 Add it to the Favourites list
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - List favourite DVB channels [Favourites Edit] - 2

text_image DVB Favourites Editor All DVB Channels Favourites 1 BBC One Wales 7 BBC THREE 14 E4 CBBC Channel70 72 Cartoon Nwk 105 BBCI 719 BBC Radio Wales 720 BBC Radio Cymru 1 BBC One Wales To add all channels to the list (yellow)

■ To edit Favourites list

While the cursor is in the Favourites field to edit
- To delete a channel - To delete all channels
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit Favourites list - 1
• To move the channel
(green)

Select the new position Select the turn Store
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit Favourites list - 2

or
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit Favourites list - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit Favourites list - 4
(green)

• To name the Favourites
(red)
Set characters (maximum: ten characters) Store
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit Favourites list - 5

text_image User input Name A B C D E F G H J L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 : # a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p a r s t u v w x y z i + - .

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit Favourites list - 6

text_image ① select ② set • To use numeric buttons → "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 110)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit Favourites list - 7

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit Favourites list - 8

3 Store
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit Favourites list - 9

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit Favourites list - 10

Note

- Channel position numbers (known as logical channel numbers) can be swapped in Channel List.

To swap the channel position number → [Channel List] (p. 54)

Check DVB signal [Signal Condition]

Selects a channel and checks the DVB signal condition.

A good Signal Strength is not an indication of best signal for DVB reception. Please use the Signal Quality indicator as follows:

[Signal Quality]:

- Green bar → Good

Yellow bar → Poor

• Red bar → Bad (Check the Terrestrial aerial)

Example :
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Signal Quality]: - 1

text_image DVB Signal Condition Channel Name 70 CBBC Channel Signal Quality 0 Signal Strength 0 Bit Error Rate 0.00E+00 Network Name Wenvoc Frequency 802.20 MHz, 64 QAM, 6940 kV

• To change the channel
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Signal Quality]: - 2

These bars show the maximum signal value of the selected channel.

Display a notification message [New Channel Message]

Selects whether to give a notification message when a new DVB channel is found. [Off] / [On]

New channels found! Press OK to update channel list. Press EXIT to ignore.

- Selecting OK will perform [Update Channel List].

Skip unwanted DVB channels, Edit DVB Channels [Channel List]

You can hide unwanted DVB channels. The hidden channels cannot be displayed except in this function. Use this function to skip unwanted channels.

Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Skip unwanted DVB channels, Edit DVB Channels [Channel List] - 1

text_image All DVB Channels ✓ 70 CBBC Channel ✓ 72 Cartoon Nwk ✓ 105 BBCi ○ 719 BBC Radio Wales ○ 720 BBC Radio Cymru □ 1 BBC ONE Wales ✓ 7 BBC THREE

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Skip unwanted DVB channels, Edit DVB Channels [Channel List] - 2
① select
② [reveal] / [hide]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Skip unwanted DVB channels, Edit DVB Channels [Channel List] - 3
:[reveal]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Skip unwanted DVB channels, Edit DVB Channels [Channel List] - 4
:[hide] (skip)

• To reveal all channels
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Skip unwanted DVB channels, Edit DVB Channels [Channel List] - 5
(yellow)

■ To edit channels

You can also edit each channel in Channel List.

• To retune each channel

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 1
(red)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 2

[Manual Tuning] (p. 52)

(only for the revealed channels)

• To swap the channel position number (logical channel number)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 3
(green)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 4

Enter the new position number

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 5
0

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 6

Channel position number
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 7

text_image 1 BBC ONE WALES Coronation Street 20:00 - 20:55 Now Info 20:35 All DVB Channels Select favourites

Store
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 8
(green)

Update DVB channel automatically [Update Channel List]

You can add new channels, delete removed channels, update channel name and position automatically to Channel List.

Example: UK
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Update DVB channel automatically [Update Channel List] - 1

text_image DVB Update Channel List Progress CH21 68 This will take about 3 minutes. CH Channels Name Type Quality FreeTV: 0 PayTV: 0 Radio: 0 Data: 0 Searching
  • Channel List is updated while keeping your settings in [Favourites Edit], [Channel List], [Child Lock], [Timer Programming], etc.
  • Depending on the signal condition, the update may not work properly.

(Analogue)

You can retune channels or skip unwanted channels, edit channels etc.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (Analogue) - 1

text_image INPUT TV MENU EXIT OK BACKU RETURN 1 2 abc 3 def 4 ghi 5 jkd 6 mno 7 pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz 0 ^ V

1

Select Analogue

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select Analogue - 1
2

Display the menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu - 1
3

Select [Setup]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 1

text_image VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 2
① select
② access
4

Select [Analogue Tuning Menu]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Analogue Tuning Menu] - 1

text_image Analogue Tuning Menu Access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Analogue Tuning Menu] - 2
① select
② access
5

Select one of the following functions

Analogue Tuning Menu
Channel ListAccess
Auto SetupAccess
Manual TuningAccess

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the following functions - 1
① select
② access

• [Auto Setup]

"Retuning from Setup Menu" (p. 49)

To return to TV
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the following functions - 2

Skip unwanted Analogue channels, Edit Analogue channels [Channel List]

You can hide unwanted Analogue channels.

The hidden channels cannot be displayed except in this function. Use this function to skip unwanted channels.

Select a channel and [reveal] / [hide]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Skip unwanted Analogue channels, Edit Analogue channels [Channel List] - 1

text_image Analogue Channel List 1 BBC1 2 ***** 3 ***** 4 ***** 5 ***** 6 ***** 7 *****

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Skip unwanted Analogue channels, Edit Analogue channels [Channel List] - 2

text_image ① select ② [reveal] / [hide] ✓ : [reveal] □ : [hide] (skip)

• To reveal all channels

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Skip unwanted Analogue channels, Edit Analogue channels [Channel List] - 3

■ To edit channels

You can also edit each channel in Channel List.

• To retune each channel

• To move the channel position

([Manual Tuning]) (see below) Select the new position Store

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 4

• To rename the channel name

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 5

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 6

Set characters (maximum: five characters) Store
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit channels - 7

text_image Edit channel name Name A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P O R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i : # a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z ( ) + . * 1 2 3 4 5 6

6

8 9

p# 10 #

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 9 - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 9 - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 9 - 3

• To use numeric buttons → "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 110)

Channel position
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 9 - 4

text_image Channel name 1 ITV CH23 23:35 All Analogue Channels

Note

- If a VCR is connected only with the RF cable, edit [VCR].

Set Analogue channel manually [Manual Tuning]

[Fine Tuning] Ireland only

Use to make small adjustments to the tuning of an individual programme (affected by weather conditions, etc.)

[Manual Tuning]

Set Analogue channel manually after Auto Setup.

- If a VCR is connected only with the RF cable, it is recommended to select channel position [0].

Example : Ireland
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Manual Tuning] - 1

text_image Analogue Manual Tuning 1 BSC1 Fine Tuning Manual Tuning CH 33 CH 1 99 H: 21 41 Store

1 Select the channel position
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Manual Tuning] - 2

2 Select the channel
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Manual Tuning] - 3

3 Search
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Manual Tuning] - 4

4 Select [Store]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Manual Tuning] - 5

(Other Sat.) UK (Satellite) Ireland

You can tune all receivable digital satellite channels and create your channel list, etc.

• Some of Other Sat. / Satellite functions may work to differing specifications (depending on the broadcasters).

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (Other Sat.) UK (Satellite) Ireland - 1

text_image 1 Select freesat or Other Sat. UK Select Satellite Ireland → (p. 18) TV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select [Setup] VIEFA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access 4 Select [Other Sat. Tuning Menu] UK Select [Satellite Tuning Menu] Ireland Other Sat. Tuning Menu Other Satellite Tuning Menu ① select ② access 5 Select one of the following functions ① select ② access CHANNEL List Access Auto Setup Access Manual Tuning Access Add New Channels Access Signal Condition Access

Set all receivable digital satellite channels [Auto Setup]

Any receivable digital compliant satellite channels can be tuned.

  • Only Other Sat. / Satellite channels are tuned or retuned.
  • All the previous tuning settings are erased.
  • If a Child Lock PIN number (p. 60) has been set, it must be entered.

1 Select the satellite and then select [Start]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the satellite and then select [Start] - 1

text_image Other Satellite Auto Setup - Satellite Selection Satellite Selection Start freesat and other channels

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the satellite and then select [Start] - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the satellite and then select [Start] - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the satellite and then select [Start] - 4

① select

② Start

- Check the dish alignment for the satellite you want to select

• Astra2/Eurobird → (p. 11)
- Astra1, Hotbird → Please consult the received satellite broadcasting companies.

  • Selectable satellites are Astra2/Eurobird, Astra1 and Hotbird.
  • If you want to tune from all available satellites, select [Any Satellite].

2 Check the signal condition and the message

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check the signal condition and the message - 1

text_image Other Satellite Add New Channels - Satellite Selection Satellite Selection Astra2/Eurobird Continue Freesat and other channels Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 Signal Lock Locked

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check the signal condition and the message - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check the signal condition and the message - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check the signal condition and the message - 4

text_image Other Satellite Auto Setup All Other Satellite tuning data will be erased

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check the signal condition and the message - 5

If you select [Any Satellite], this step is skipped.

  • It takes a while to check the connection for your selected satellite.
  • Ensure that the Signal Lock status is shown as "Locked". If it is not locked, the search cannot be executed.
  • If the status is shown as "Not locked" and Signal Quality / Signal Strength have no indications, please check the dish alignment. If the status is shown as "Not locked" but there are some levels of Signal Quality / Signal Strength indicated, select [Any Satellite] in Satellite Selection and try again.

3 Select the search mode and start Auto Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the search mode and start Auto Setup - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the search mode and start Auto Setup - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the search mode and start Auto Setup - 3

text_image Other Satellite Auto Setup Satellite Astra 2/Eurobird Progress 0% 15000 This may take up to 30 minutes. No. Channel Name Type Quality 1 BBC 1 East (W) Free TV 10 2 BBC 1 CI Free TV 10 3 BBC HD Free TV 10 4 Free TV 1 Free TV: 4 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Searching

- If you select [Astra2/Eurobird] or [Any Satellite], freesat channels will also be searched.

0

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the search mode and start Auto Setup - 4

Settings are made automatically

When the operation is completed, the channel at the lowest position will be displayed.

Add Other Sat. / Satellite channels automatically [Add New Channels]

You can add any new channels found automatically to Channel List.

1 Check the signal condition

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check the signal condition - 1

text_image Other Satellite Add New Channels - Satellite Selection Satellite Selection Astra2/Eurobird Start freesat and other channels Signal Quality 0 10 Signal Strength 0 10 Signal Lock Locked

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check the signal condition - 2

  • It takes a while to check the connection for your selected satellite.
  • Ensure that the Signal Lock status is shown as "Locked". If it is not locked, the search cannot be executed.
  • If the status is shown as "Not locked" and Signal Quality / Signal Strength have no indications, please check the dish alignment.

2 Select the search mode and start Add New Channels

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the search mode and start Add New Channels - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the search mode and start Add New Channels - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the search mode and start Add New Channels - 3

text_image Other Satellite Add New Channels Satellite Astra2/Eurobird Progress 0% 100% This may take up to 20 minutes. No. Channel Name Type Quality Free TV: 0 Pay TV: 0 Radio: 0 Searching

- New channels can only be added to the existing Channel List from the same satellite.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the search mode and start Add New Channels - 4

List favourite Other Sat. / Satellite channels [Favourites Edit]

Create your favourite channel lists from various broadcasters (up to 4: [Favourites]1 to 4).

The Other Sat. / Satellite Favourites lists are available for switching in the Information banner (p. 19)

• To create the Other Sat. / Satellite Favourites list, refer to "List favourite DVB channels" (p. 53)

Create the channel list of Other Sat. / Satellite [Channel List]

Create your channel list of Other Sat. / Satellite for viewing from all the found channels to exclude the duplicated channels or to reduce the number of channels. And then you can select your desired channels easily.

1 Select a channel to list in [Channels for Viewing]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select a channel to list in [Channels for Viewing] - 1

text_image Other Satellite Channel List Editor Channels Found - All BBC One Wales BBC THREE E4 CBBC Channel Cartoon Nwk BBCI BBC Radio Wales BBC Radio Cymru Channels for Viewing select To change the category (red)

2 Add it to the Favourites list

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Add it to the Favourites list - 1

text_image Other Satellite Channel List Editor Channels Found - All BBC One Wales BBC THREE E4 CBC Channel Cartoon Nwk BBC1 BBC Radio Wales BBC Radio Cymru Channels for Viewing 1 BBC One Wales A channel is added

• To add continuous block of channels to the list at once

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Add it to the Favourites list - 2

text_image (yellow) ① make the block ② add

• To delete the selected channel from the list of [Channels Found]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Add it to the Favourites list - 3

(green)

• To exclude the selected channel from the list of [Channels for Viewing]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Add it to the Favourites list - 4

• To move the selected channel in the list of [Channels for Viewing]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Add it to the Favourites list - 5

flowchart
graph LR
    A["(green)"] --> B["Select the new position"]
    B --> C["or"]
    C --> D["Select the turn"]
    D --> E["(green)"]

Set Other Sat. / Satellite channel manually [Manual Tuning]

Normally use [Auto Setup] or [Add New Channels] to tune Other Sat. / Satellite channels.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set Other Sat. / Satellite channel manually [Manual Tuning] - 1

text_image Other Satellite Manual Tuning Transponder Frequency 10773 Polarisation Horizontal Symbol Rate (Ksym/s) Auto Start Scan

- Set tuning parameters for the required satellite, details can usually be found in a satellite TV magazine.

Timer Programming

Timer Programming from Menu

The Timer Programming menu allows you to choose programmes that you wish to remind watching or record to the external recorder or the USB HDD. At the correct time, the TV will tune to the correct channel automatically to record even if the TV is in Standby mode. TV Guide may also be used to set timer programming event (p. 24).

  • Timer Programming can store up to 15 events.
  • For recording using Timer Programming, the TV must be either On or in standby. For reminders to be displayed, the TV must be On.
  • No other channel can be selected while the recording of Timer Programming is in progress.
  • It may not be possible to record an encrypted programme (which is copy-protected).
  • When recording programmes to the external recorder, be sure to make the proper settings on the recorder connected to the TV. If a compatible recorder with Q-Link or similar technologies is connected to the TV (p. 97) and the [Link Settings] (p. 41) are correct, no setting of the recorder is required. Also read the manual of the recorder.
  • If the recorder is not compatible with Q-Link or similar technologies, set the timer of the recorder in addition to the Timer Programming on the TV. For preparations of a recorder, read the manual of the recorder.
  • When recording programmes to the USB HDD, be sure to format the USB HDD and enable it for recording in [Recording Setup] (p. 68).
  • Recordings to the external recorders are always in standard definition composite video via SCART, even if the original programme is in high definition.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Timer Programming from Menu - 1

text_image INPUT TV MENU EXIT GUIDE OK

1 Select the tuner you want to use

→ (p. 18)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the tuner you want to use - 1

2 Display the menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu - 1

3 Select [Timer]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Timer] - 1

text_image VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Timer] - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Timer] - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["EXIT"] --> B["To return to TV"]
    B --> C["To unlock the tuner and stop recording"]
    C --> D["EXIT"]

4 Select [Timer Programming]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Timer Programming] - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Timer Programming] - 2

Note

  • Check that the LED is orange. If not, timer programmes are not active or not stored.
  • Timer Programming reminder messages will remain displayed until one of the following occurs:

- You press the OK button to view the programme or the EXIT button to cancel the reminder.

• The timer programming event that the reminder is set for ends.

  • “!” identifies that any timer programming events have overlapped. [Ext Rec.] and [USB HDD Rec.] are given priority over [Reminder]. As for the overlapped two or more [Ext Rec.] / [USB HDD Rec.], the first timer programming event starts and finishes as programmed. The next timer programming event can then start.
  • 2 minutes before the starting time, a reminder message appears if you are watching TV.

• To remove the message and start the programme

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 1

• To cancel the Timer Programming

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 2

• The recording of Timer Programming will automatically change to the programmed channel 10 seconds before the start time.
- To stop recording of the timer programming event, it may be necessary to stop the recorder manually.
- The recording of Timer Programming will be performed even if the TV is in Rewind LIVE TV recording (p. 71) or Pause Live TV recording (p. 100). In this case, these recordings will be cancelled.

Set timer programming event details [Timer Programming]

1 Start making the settings

2 Select the function ([Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.] or [Reminder])

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the function ([Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.] or [Reminder]) - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the function ([Ext Rec.], [USB HDD Rec.] or [Reminder]) - 2

select

[Ext Rec.] / [USB HDD Rec.]

to record the programme to the external recorder or the USB HDD When the start time comes, the channel will be switched automatically and the video and audio signals will be output. 2 minutes before the starting time, a reminder message appears if you are watching TV.

[Reminder] 📁 to remind you to watch the programme When you are watching TV, a reminder message appears 2 minutes before the start time. Press the OK button to switch to the programmed channel.

3 Set the channel, date and time (repeat the operations as below)

Set items in the order of 1 to 4.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set the channel, date and time (repeat the operations as below) - 1

select the item

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set the channel, date and time (repeat the operations as below) - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set the channel, date and time (repeat the operations as below) - 3

set

• 1, 3 and 4 can also be entered with numeric buttons.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set the channel, date and time (repeat the operations as below) - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set the channel, date and time (repeat the operations as below) - 5

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set the channel, date and time (repeat the operations as below) - 6

! : Displayed if the timer programming events are overlapped

Timer programming - Programmes according to the time setting

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set the channel, date and time (repeat the operations as below) - 7

text_image Timer Programming Function No. Channel Name Wed 27.10.2010 10:46 Ext Rec. 72 BBC 2W 20:00 21:30 Date Start End Reminder 14 E4 The Bill Guide Wed 27 Oct (90 min.) Ext Rec. 1 BBC ONE DIY SOS Wed 27 Oct 21:00 22:00 STTL Wed 27 Oct (60 min.) Ext Rec. BBC ONE STTL Thu 28 Oct 22:45 23:00 STTL Thu 28 Oct 10:30 11:30 STTL Thu 28 Oct (60 min.) Change function Store timer EXIT Select Return Remaining Capacity: 0 9 £500GB (50%) Information of the USB HDD (if available) 1 Channel number : freesat / D : DVB / A : Analogue / S : Other Sat. UK D : DVB / A : Analogue / S : Satellite Ireland You cannot change the mode within the menu. Duration (automatic display) Records with subtitles (if available) To indicate this (yellow) (Press again to remove subtitles) 2 Date one day ahead daily or weekly (press repeatedly) [Daily Sun-Sat] : Sunday to Saturday [Daily Mon-Sat] : Monday to Saturday [Daily Mon-Fri] : Monday to Friday [Weekly Sat/Fri/Thu/Wed/Tue/Mon/Sun] : Same time on the same day every week 4 Ending time 3 Starting time

UK only

Guide : Guide link programming - Programmes according to the TV Guide signal (p. 25)

S/P : Split Programme programming (p. 25)

• These functions are not available in Analogue mode or Other Sat. mode.

Guide link programming is Timer Programming which is controlled by information from the TV Guide; if programme start and end times are changed by the broadcaster, the timer programming event will follow the change.

A Split Programme programming is a Guide link programming which is interrupted by one or more other programmes.

Note that Guide link programming (including Split Programme programming) only works reliably if correct information is received from broadcasters.

■ To change a timer programming event

Select the programme to be changed

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change a timer programming event - 1

①select

②access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change a timer programming event - 2

Correct as necessary (as above)

■ To record with subtitles (if available)

Select the programme to record with subtitles

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To record with subtitles (if available) - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To record with subtitles (if available) - 2

(yellow)

• Each time pressed:

auto ←→ off

■ To cancel a timer programming event

Select the programme to be deleted

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To cancel a timer programming event - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To cancel a timer programming event - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To cancel a timer programming event - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To cancel a timer programming event - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To cancel a timer programming event - 5

■ To cancel a timer programming event temporarily

Select the programme to be cancelled

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To cancel a timer programming event temporarily - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To cancel a timer programming event temporarily - 2

(blue)

• Each time pressed:

cancel ←→ stop cancelling

Select the programme to be viewed

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To view details of the programming (only for Guide link programming) UK only - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To view details of the programming (only for Guide link programming) UK only - 2

- Press again to return to Timer Programming menu.

Child Lock

You can lock specific channels / AV input terminals and control who watches them.

When the locked channel / input is selected, a message appears; by entering the PIN number, you can watch it.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Child Lock - 1

text_image MENU EXIT 1 Display the menu MENU 2 Select [Setup] VIEFA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access 3 Select [Child Lock] Access ① select ② access

Control channel audience [Child Lock]

1 Enter the PIN number (4 digits)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Control channel audience [Child Lock] - 1

text_image Child Lock-PIN Entry Please enter new PIN PIN * * * * 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
  • Enter the PIN number twice at first setting.
  • Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it.

3 Select the channel / input to be locked
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Control channel audience [Child Lock] - 2

text_image Child Lock List - TV and AV Name Input Type Lock 101 BBC 1 Wales DVB Free TV 7 BBC THREE DVB Free TV 14 E4C DVB Free TV VCR Analogue Analogue 1 BSC1 Analogue Analogue 2 **** Analogue Analogue AV1 External AV AV2 External AV ① select ② lock

: Appears when the channel / input is locked

2 Select [Child Lock List]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Control channel audience [Child Lock] - 3

text_image Child Lock Change PIN Child Lock List Access ① select ② access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Control channel audience [Child Lock] - 4

text_image To lock all (green) To cancel all locks (yellow) To jump to the top of the next input (blue)

• To cancel
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Control channel audience [Child Lock] - 5

text_image Select the locked channel / input

- In freesat mode, additional lock items will appear.

[freesat Adult Channels] :

Select "Hide" to hide channels of the adult genre in TV Guide and Channel List. All the Timer Programming events of the adult genre will be cancelled.

[freesat Players] : Locks freesat content supplied through the internet.

Unlock: With this setting selected, you will not be required to enter your 4 digit child lock PIN when viewing freesat Player content. This is the default setting.

Lock Guidance Content: With this setting selected, you will be asked to enter your 4 digit child lock PIN whenever you wish to watch freesat Player content which is signalled as "Guidance" (i.e. originally broadcast post watershed).

Lock All Content: With this setting selected, you will be required to enter your 4 digit child lock PIN every time you wish to watch freesat Player content.

■ To change the PIN number

  1. Select [Change PIN] If the DVB programme has the rated information for over the
Child Lock
Change PINAccess
Child Lock List

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change the PIN number - 1

  1. Enter a new PIN number twice

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To change the PIN number - 2

Note

- Setting [Shipping Condition] (p. 62) erases the PIN number and all settings.

■ To set Parental Rating and only

selected age, you have to enter the PIN number to watch (depending on the broadcaster).

Select [Parental Rating] and set an age for the restriction of programmes.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To set Parental Rating and only - 1

text_image Child Lock Change PIN Child Lock List Parental Rating No limit

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To set Parental Rating and only - 2

Input Labels

For easier identification and selection of the input mode, you can label each input mode or skip terminals that are not connected to any equipment.

• To select the input mode (p. 30)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Input Labels - 1

text_image MENU EXIT OK BACKI RETURN Panasonic TV

To return to TV EXIT

1

Display the menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu - 1

2

Select [Setup]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 1

text_image VIEA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 2

3

Select [Display Settings]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Display Settings] - 1

text_image Display Settings Access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Display Settings] - 2

4

Select [Input Labels]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Input Labels] - 1

text_image Display Settings Input Labels Access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Input Labels] - 2

5

Select an input terminal

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select an input terminal - 1

text_image Input Labels AV1 DVD AV2 AV2 COMPONENT COMPONENT HDMI1 HDMI1 HDMI2 HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI3 HDMI4 HDMI4 freesat freesat Satellite Satellite UK Ireland

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select an input terminal - 2

The labels you set will be displayed in the [Input Selection] menu (p. 30), [TV Selection] menu (p. 18) or banner. - If [Skip] is selected, the input will not be displayed in the [Input Selection] menu and you cannot select the mode.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select an input terminal - 3

text_image Input Labels DVB DVB Analogue Analogue Other Sat. Other Sat. 2/2 UK

User input

You can name each input mode yourself.

1 Select [User input]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - User input - 1

2 Set characters (maximum: ten characters)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - User input - 2

text_image User input Name A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 | : # a b c d e f g h -iJK l m n{o p Qi s T u v w x y z ( ) + - .* __ 1 7 3 3 6 6 7 8 9 0

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - User input - 3

3 Store
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - User input - 4

• To use numeric buttons

"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 110)

Shipping Condition

Resets the TV to its original condition with no channels tuned in.

All settings other than [Owner ID] and [USB HDD Setup] are reset (channels, picture, sound settings, etc.).

• To retune TV channels only, e.g. after moving house → "Retuning from Setup Menu" (p. 48, 49)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Shipping Condition - 1

1

Display the menu

MENU

2

Select [Setup]

3

Select [System Menu]

4

Select [Shipping Condition]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Shipping Condition] - 1

Restore Settings [Shipping Condition]

1 Check the message and initialise

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Check the message and initialise - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["All tuning data will be erased"] --> B["1 (Confirm)"]
    A --> C["2 (Confirm)"]
    A --> D["3 (Start [Shipping Condition"])]
    B --> E["Are you sure?"]
    C --> F["Are you sure?"]

2 Follow the on screen instructions

Reset to Factory Shipping Condition Completed. Please switch off TV.

- [Auto Setup] will automatically start when Mains power On / Off switch is next turned On. (p. 13)

Owner ID

Entry of the PIN number and personal information (your name, address and postcode). In the unfortunate event of theft, the Owner ID will help the Police to determine the owner.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Owner ID - 1

text_image MENU EXIT 1 Display the menu MENU 2 Select [Setup] VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access 3 Select [System Menu] Access ① select ② access 4 Select [Owner ID] System Menu Access ① select ② access To return to TV EXIT

Input owner ID [Owner ID]

1 Enter the PIN number (4 digits)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter the PIN number (4 digits) - 1

text_image Owner ID Please enter new PIN PIN * * * *

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter the PIN number (4 digits) - 2

- Enter the PIN number twice at first setting. - Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it. The PIN number cannot be reset.

2 Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) and set characters

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) and set characters - 1

text_image Owner ID-Data Entry PIN * * * * NAME HOUSE NO POSTCODE

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) and set characters - 2

text_image User input NAME A B C D E F G H I J K L M N D P Q R S T U V W X Y Z O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ! . a a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s c u v w x y z ( ) - - - * _

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) and set characters - 3

text_image Return to select other items BACK RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) and set characters - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the item (NAME / HOUSE NO / POSTCODE) and set characters - 5

text_image ① select ② set

- Select the next item and repeat the operations.

• To use numeric buttons → "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 110)

3 Exit the menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Exit the menu - 1

To check the personal information stored

Hold down for about 5 seconds

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To check the personal information stored - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To check the personal information stored - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To check the personal information stored - 3

text_image Owner ID NAME * * * * * HOUSE NO * * * * * POSTCODE * * * * * * EXIT

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To check the personal information stored - 4

natural_image Exterior view of a modern office building (no signage)

• The PIN number is not displayed.

■ To change the PIN number

1. Select [PIN]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [PIN] - 1

text_image Owner ID-Data Entry PIN * * * * NAME HOUSE NO POSTCODE

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [PIN] - 2

① select

② access

2. Enter a new PIN number twice

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter a new PIN number twice - 1

Using Common Interface

The Common Interface Module menu provides access to software contained on Common Interface (CI) Modules. This TV works only for Pay TV modules complying with CI standard.

• This function is not available for BskyB's Sky channels.
• Video and audio signals may not be output depending on broadcasts or services.

Caution

  • Turn Off Mains power On / Off switch whenever inserting or removing the CI module.
  • If a viewing card and a card reader come as a set, first insert the card reader, then insert the viewing card into the card reader.
  • Insert the module in the correct direction.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Caution - 1

text_image Clslot Panasonic Insert or remove straightly and completely Clmodule

Insert the CI module (optional)

• The features that appear on screen are dependent on the contents of the selected CI module.
- Follow the instructions that came with the viewing card to tune in the encrypted channels. If encrypted channels do not appear, perform the below to verify the card is recognised by the TV.
- For more details, see the manual of the CI module, or check with the broadcaster.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Insert the CI module (optional) - 1

text_image 1 Select DVB → (p. 18) TV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select [Setup] VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access 4 Select [System Menu] System Menu Access ① select ② access 5 Select [Common Interface] System Menu USB Keyboard Layout English(UK) Shipping Condition Owner ID Common Interface Access System Update Software Licence System Information ① select ② access 6 Access Common Interface Common Interface Slot 1: Module Inserted EXIT To return to TV EXIT

■ How to operate services by following the on screen operation guide

(Check the instructions provided with the CI module.)

Example:

- Select,go

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate services by following the on screen operation guide - 1

• Symbol: ◀▶▶

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate services by following the on screen operation guide - 2

- Colouredcharacters

Coloured button

- On screen operation guide may not correspond to the remote control buttons.

Updating the TV Software

From time to time, a new version of software may become available for download to enhance the performance or operations of the TV. In DVB mode, a notification banner will appear when one of the BBC channels is turned to if a new available software is found.

• To download

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Updating the TV Software - 1

- If you choose not to download

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Updating the TV Software - 2

You can update any new software automatically or manually.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Updating the TV Software - 3

text_image MENU EXIT OK

1

Display the menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu - 1

2

Select [Setup]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 1

text_image VIETA Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 2

① select

② access

3

Select [System Menu]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [System Menu] - 1

text_image System Menu Access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [System Menu] - 2

① select

② access

4

Select [System Update]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [System Update] - 1

text_image System Menu USB Keyboard Layout English(UK) Shipping Condition Owner ID Common Interface System Update Access Software Licence System Information

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [System Update] - 2

① select

② access

To return to TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [System Update] - 3

Update TV's software system [System Update]

■ To update automatically

Select [Auto Update Search in Standby] and set to [On]

System Update
Auto Update Search in StandbyOff
System Update Search Now

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To update automatically - 1

select

access / store

If System Update is performed, the software will be updated (it may change TV functions).

If you do not wish to do so, set [Auto Update Search in Standby] to [Off]. The notification banner will keep appearing during the period of new software availability, usually 2 to 3 days.

  • Automatically performs a search in standby and downloads an update, if any software updates are available.
  • The automatic updating is performed at night under the following conditions:
  • Standby (TV turned Off with the remote control)
  • Recording of Timer Programming, Direct TV Recording or One Touch Recording is not in progress.

■ To update immediately

1 Select [System Update Search Now]

System Update
Auto Update Search in StandbyOff
System Update Search NowAccess

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [System Update Search Now] - 1

① select

②access

2 Searches for an update (for several minutes) and displays a corresponding message if any

3 Download

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Download - 1

Note

• Download may take up to 60 minutes.
- During software download and update, DO NOT perform any operations on the TV or switch Off the TV.

AdvancedPictureSettings

You can adjust and setup the detailed picture settings for each Viewing Mode.
- To use this function completely, set [Advance(isfccc)] to [On] in the Setup Menu. (p. 43)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - AdvancedPictureSettings - 1

text_image 1 Select the input mode to adjust and setup (p. 18, 30) TV AV 2 Display the menu MENU 3 Select[Picture] Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup ① select ② access 4 Select [Viewing Mode] and set the mode Dynamic Normal Cinema True Cinema Professional1 Viewing Mode Professional2 select access / store 5 Select one of the following functions Advanced Settings Access Lock Settings Access Copy Adjustment Access Reset to Defaults Reset ① select ② access • [Copy Adjustment] is avail [Viewing Mode] in the Pict [Professional1] or [Professi to return to TV EXIT

Adjust the detailed picture settings [Advanced Settings]

Advanced Settings
White BalanceAccess
Colour ManagementAccess
GammaAccess

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Adjust the detailed picture settings [Advanced Settings] - 1

MenuItemAdjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
PictureAdvanced SettingsWhite BalanceR-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright red area
G-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright green area
B-GainAdjusts the white balance of bright blue area
R-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark red area
G-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark green area
B-CutoffAdjusts the white balance of dark blue area
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset to the default White Balance
MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
PictureAdvancedSettingsColourManagementR-HueAdjusts the picture hue of red area
G-HueAdjusts the picture hue of green area
B-HueAdjusts the picture hue of blue area
R-SaturationAdjusts the saturation of red area
G-SaturationAdjusts the saturation of green area
B-SaturationAdjusts the saturation of blue area
R-LuminanceAdjusts the luminance of red area
G-LuminanceAdjusts the luminance of green area
B-LuminanceAdjusts the luminance of blue area
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset to the default Colour Management
GammaGammaSwitches the gamma curve [S Curve] / [1.8] / [2.0] / [2.2] / [2.4] / [2.6]Please note the numerical values are reference for the adjustment.
Reset to DefaultsPress the OK button to reset to the default Gamma
  • [Colour Management] is available when [Viewing Mode] in the Picture Menu is set to [Professional1] or [Professional2].

Lock the picture setting [Lock Settings]

Advanced Settings can be locked for each Viewing Mode.

Additionally, [Contrast], [Brightness], [Colour], [Sharpness], [Tint] and [Reset to Defaults] in the Picture Menu can be locked for [Professional1] and [Professional2].

[Professional1] and [Professional2] can be locked for each input.

1 Enter the PIN number (4 digits)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter the PIN number (4 digits) - 1

text_image Lock Settings-PIN Entry Please enter new PIN PIN * * * *

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter the PIN number (4 digits) - 2

  • Enter the PIN number twice at first setting.
    • Make a note of the PIN number in case you forget it.

2 Select [Adjustment Lock] and set to [On]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Adjustment Lock] and set to [On] - 1

text_image LockSettings ChangePIN On

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Adjustment Lock] and set to [On] - 2

select

access / store

■ To change the PIN number

1. Select [Change PIN]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Change PIN] - 1

text_image LockSettings ChangePIN Access AdjustmentLock On

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Change PIN] - 2

① select

② access

2. Enter a new PIN number twice

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter a new PIN number twice - 1

Copy the settings to the other input [Copy Adjustment]

You can copy the selected [Professional1] or [Professional2] settings to that of the other input.

The settings of [Contrast], [Brightness], [Colour], [Sharpness], [Tint] and [Advanced Settings] will be copied.

Select the destination to copy to

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the destination to copy to - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the destination to copy to - 2

select

access / store

- You cannot copy to the locked mode.

USB HDD Recording

You can record the digital TV programmes to the connected USB HDD and enjoy playing back in various ways.

  • Analogue TV programme cannot be recorded to the USB HDD.
  • The data broadcasting (MHEG, etc.), radio broadcasting and the periods without any signal will not be recorded.
  • Not all the programmes can be recorded depending on the broadcaster and service provider.
  • For more information of the USB HDD (p. 109)

Caution

  • All data in the USB HDD will be erased in the following cases:
  • When formatting the USB HDD with the TV "Setting for USB HDD" (see below)
  • When formatting the USB HDD to use on PC
  • When the TV is repaired due to a malfunction, you may have to format the USB HDD again with the TV to use it. (All data will be erased when formatting.)
  • In order to use the USB HDD with your PC after recording with this TV, format it again on your PC. (Special operations or tools may be necessary to format on your PC. For details, refer to the manual of the USB HDD.)
  • The data recorded to the USB HDD with this TV can only be played back on this TV. You cannot play back its contents with another TV (including the TV of the same model number) or any PCs.

USB HDD connection

Connect the USB HDD to the USB 3 port.

socket outlet

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - USB HDD connection - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Power Source"] --> B["USB HDD"]
    B --> C["USB cable"]
    C --> D["USB 3 HDD"]
  • Be sure to connect the USB HDD to the socket outlet.
  • Do not turn off or disconnect the USB HDD during operation. It may cause malfunction of the drive or damage the recorded data.
    • To remove the USB HDD safely from the TV (p. 20, 69)

Setting for USB HDD

Format and setup the USB HDD with this TV in order to use it for recording.

  • Before the settings, connect the USB HDD (see above) and be sure to turn on the USB HDD.
  • You cannot change the settings for the USB HDD while recording is in progress.
  • Please note that USB HDD will be formatted and all data in it will be erased when you format it.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Setting for USB HDD - 1

text_image MENU EXIT OK BACK/ RETURN

To return to TV EXIT

1

Display the menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu - 1

2

Select [Setup]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 1

text_image VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 2

3

Select [Recording Setup]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Recording Setup] - 1

text_image Recording Setup Access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Recording Setup] - 2

4

Select [USB HDD Setup] and set

Recording Setup
USB HDD SetupAccess
One Touch Recording180 minutes
Rewind LIVE TVOff

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [USB HDD Setup] and set - 1

Setup the USB HDD [USB HDD Setup]

All the USB devices recognised as a mass storage device will be listed.

- You can only choose one USB HDD for recording at a time.

1 Select the USB HDD for recording and start setup

USB HDD Setup
Product Name
USB Drive A
USB Flash Disk

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the USB HDD for recording and start setup - 1

  • Some USB HDD may not be displayed.
    • For the information of the highlighted device

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the USB HDD for recording and start setup - 2

2 Caution and confirmation of using USB HDD

Select [Yes] to proceed

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 1

text_image USB HDD Formatting The data recorded to the USB HDD with this TV can only be played back on this TV. You cannot playback it with other TV (including the TV of the same model number) or any PCs. If your TV is repaired due to a malfunction, the USB HDD may not be available with your repaired TV. Continue? Yes

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 2

text_image USB HDD Formatting To use this device for recording, it must be formatted first. Continue? Yes

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 3

text_image USB HDD Formatting This device will be formatted and all contents deleted. Are you sure? Yes

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 5

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Yes] to proceed - 6

3 Confirmation of USB HDD name

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Confirmation of USB HDD name - 1

text_image USB HDD Formatting Name: USB Drive A Edit name? Yes No

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Confirmation of USB HDD name - 2

The name for the USB HDD is created automatically. If you want to edit the name, select [Yes].

Set characters Store

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set characters Store - 1

text_image USB HDD Name USB HDD 1 A C D E F G H J K L M N D P Q R S T U Y W X Y Z O I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ; a a a c d e f g h j k l m n o p q r s t u y w y z 2 1 - - _

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set characters Store - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set characters Store - 3

- You can set characters by using numeric buttons.

4 Confirmation to enable USB HDD for recording

If the formatted USB HDD for recording already exists, this confirmation screen will be displayed to switch to enable this USB HDD for recording.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Confirmation to enable USB HDD for recording - 1

text_image USB HDD Formatting Do you want to enable this device now for recording? When disconnecting any USB device, always use the "Safely Remove USB" function in the USB HDD Device Setup menu to avoid any corruption of recorded content. Yes

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Confirmation to enable USB HDD for recording - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Confirmation to enable USB HDD for recording - 3

text_image USB HDD Setup Product Name USB Drive A USB Flash Disk USB HDD 1

Mode

The USB HDD is available for recording / playing back. Only one USB HDD on the list can be available for recording.
: The USB HDD is available for playing back.

USB HDD name is displayed

• To format

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - USB HDD name is displayed - 1

• To edit USB HDD name

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - USB HDD name is displayed - 2

• To change the mode

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - USB HDD name is displayed - 3

• To remove the USB HDD safely from the TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - USB HDD name is displayed - 4

• To set "Safely remove USB" in other conditions (p. 20)

Recording the TV programme to USB HDD

You can record the current programme immediately by using [One Touch Recording].

You can also record the current programme constantly for the selected period by using [Rewind LIVE TV] so that you can go back or pause the current programme.

  • Ensure the connection and setup are completed before start recording (p. 68, 69)
  • Ensure not to connect or disconnect any USB devices during USB HDD recording. Otherwise the recording may not work properly.
  • If the remaining capacity of the USB HDD is run out, the recording cannot be done.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Recording the TV programme to USB HDD - 1

text_image MENU EXIT GUIDE OK REC DVD/VCR TV Panasonic TV

To return to TV
EXIT

1 Display the menu

MENU

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu - 1

2 Select [Setup]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 1

text_image VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Setup] - 2

3 Select [Recording Setup]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Recording Setup] - 1

text_image TV Guide Settings Eco Navigation Recording Setup Access Link Settings Child Lock DVB Tuning Menu Display Settings Network Setup DivX® VOD

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Recording Setup] - 2

4. Select [One Touch Recording] or [Rewind LIVE TV]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [One Touch Recording] or [Rewind LIVE TV] - 1

text_image Recording Setup USB HDD Setup One Touch Recording 180 minutes Rewind LIVE TV Off

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [One Touch Recording] or [Rewind LIVE TV] - 2

One touch direct TV recording - What you see is What you record

[One Touch Recording]

Recording the current programme in the USB HDD immediately.

Select the maximum recording time [30] / [60] / [90] / [120] / [180] (minutes)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [One Touch Recording] - 1

text_image Recording Setup USB HDD Setup One Touch Recording 180 minutes Rewind LIVE TV Off

LED will turn to orange (flash) while One Touch Recording is in progress.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [One Touch Recording] - 2

text_image LED

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [One Touch Recording] - 3

■ To start One Touch Recording

Set the position to "TV" Start

DVD/VCR...TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To start One Touch Recording - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To start One Touch Recording - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To start One Touch Recording - 3

- No other channel can be selected while the recording is in progress.

■ To stop recording on the way

DVD/VCR..TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording on the way - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording on the way - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording on the way - 3

or

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording on the way - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording on the way - 5

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording on the way - 6

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording on the way - 7

■ To playback or delete the recorded contents → "Recorded TV mode" (p. 80)

- Even if One Touch Recording is in progress, you can playback all the contents. However, the recording may not work properly while playback.

Record constantly [Rewind LIVE TV]

Recording the currently viewed channel constantly.

Select [Auto] to start Rewind LIVE TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Record constantly [Rewind LIVE TV] - 1

text_image Recording Setup USB HDD Setup One Touch Recording 180 minutes Rewind LIVE TV Auto

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Record constantly [Rewind LIVE TV] - 2

select

access / store

  • When you select [Auto], the recording will start automatically.
  • If the other recording is in progress, TV signal condition is bad or when any images are not displayed, this recording will not start.

■ To operate the Rewind LIVE TV

Set the position to "TV"

DVD/VCR..TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 1

• To pause

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 2

• To search backward (up to 90 minutes)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 3

(Press and hold)

- After pausing or searching backward, the following buttons are available to operate.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 4

search backward

playback / pause

search forward

stop (stops the current operation and goes back to live TV)

search backward /

forward

pause /

playback

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 5
(Press and hold)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 6

playback stop

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 7

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To operate the Rewind LIVE TV - 8

stops the current operation and goes back to live TV

■ To stop the Rewind LIVE TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop the Rewind LIVE TV - 1

text_image Recording Setup USB HDD Setup One Touch Recording Rewind LIVE TV Off Auto

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop the Rewind LIVE TV - 2

select [Off]

- If you stop the Rewind LIVE TV, the recorded content for the Rewind LIVE TV will be deleted.

- Rewind LIVE TV will be stopped and the recorded content deleted automatically in the following conditions: (Even if Rewind LIVETV stops for the following conditions, as long as the setting is [Auto], the new recording will start automatically in a condition that makes the recording available.)

• selected other channels
- selected locked channel
- selected invalid channel
- no TV signal
- when the other recording starts
- when the TV is turned off or standby

Using Media Player

Media Player allows you to enjoy photo, video or music recorded on an SD Card and a USB Flash Memory, and recorded contents on the formatted USB HDD.

VIERA IMAGE VIEWER is the function of the easy viewing for photos or videos recorded on an SD Card on the TV screen by simply inserting into the SD Card slot.

Photo mode : Still pictures recorded by digital cameras will be displayed.

Video mode : (For SD Card or USB Flash Memory) Moving pictures recorded by digital video cameras will be played back.

Recorded TV mode : (For USB HDD) TV programmes recorded in USB HDD with this TV will be played back.

Music mode : Digital music data will be played back.

  • During the operation, audio signal is output from AV1, AUDIO OUT, DIGITAL AUDIO OUT and HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals. But no video signals are output. AV1 can output audio signal if [AV1 out] is set to [Monitor] in the Setup Menu (p. 41). To use HDMI2 with ARC function, connect an amplifier that has ARC function (p. 96) and set to use theatre speakers (p. 102).
  • [Date] shows the date on which the recording was made by the recording equipment. The file without record of the date is shown "**/**/*****".
    • The picture may not appear correctly on this TV depending on the recording equipment used.
  • Display may take some time when there are many files and folders.
  • Partly degraded files might be displayed at a reduced resolution.
    ● Picture setting may not work depending on the conditions.
  • The folder and file names may be different depending on the digital camera or digital video camera used.

To insert or remove the SD Card / USB Flash Memory

• For the USB HDD Connection (p. 68)

USBFlashMemory

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - USBFlashMemory - 1

natural_image Diagram of a mechanical device with a base and clamped component (no text or symbols)
  • Insert or remove straightly and completely.
  • Before removing the USB Flash Memory, ensure to perform "Safely remove USB" (p. 20).
  • Connect to the USB 1, 2 or 3 port.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - USBFlashMemory - 2

SDCard

To insert the SD Card To remove the SD Card

①Gently insert the SD Card label surface facing front.

② Push until a click is heard

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To insert the SD Card To remove the SD Card - 1

text_image S Cutout

Push the centre of the card

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - To insert the SD Card To remove the SD Card - 2

  • For the information of the devices "Devices for recording or playing back" (p. 109)
  • For the supported file format "Supported file format in Media Player and media servers" (p. 107, 108)

Starting Media Player

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Starting Media Player - 1

text_image INPUT AV EXIT OK BACKI RETURN

To return to TV
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Starting Media Player - 2
To return to the previous screen

BACK/RETURN
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Starting Media Player - 3

1 Insert the SD Card or USB Flash Memory to the TV

→ (p. 72)

  • To play back contents in USB HDD, check the connection and settings are completed. → (p. 68, 69)

2 Start Media Player

Media Player

Signal output from all AV terminals will be disabled during Media Player view. Press OK to proceed. Press EXIT to return to TV viewing.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Media Player - 1

  • Also possible by pressing following buttons.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Media Player - 2

3 Select the device you want to access to

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the device you want to access to - 1

text_image Media Player Drive Select EXIT Select RETURN Access SD Card SD Card USB HDD1 USB Flash...

Selected device name

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the device you want to access to - 2

① select ② access

- If two or more devices are not connected, this step will be skipped.

4 Select the content

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the content - 1

text_image Media Player Contents Select EXIT Select RETURN Access SD Card Photo Video Music Recorded TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the content - 2

① select ② access

[Photo]→"Photo mode" (see below)
[Video]→"Video mode" (p. 78)
[Music]→"Music mode" (p. 82)
[Recorded TV] → "Recorded TV mode" (p. 80)

Note

  • You can also access each mode directly by using VIERA TOOLS.
    → "How to Use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 36)
    • [Recorded TV] is available for USB HDD.
  • Select the appropriate device and content for playing back each file.

Photo mode

Photo mode will read all ".jpg" extension files in the SD Card or USB Flash Memory.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Photo mode - 1

text_image i EXIT OK OPTION BACK/ RETURN

To return to TV

EXIT

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Photo mode - 2
To return to the previous screen

BACK/RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Photo mode - 3

The thumbnail of all the photos in the SD Card or USB Flash Memory will be displayed.

Example : Thumbnail - [All photos]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Photo mode - 4

text_image Media Player Photo All photos View Select EXIT RETURN Info Option Menu SD Card Slideshow View Select Drive Select Contents Select

: Error display Selected device name

• To change the back ground music
"Photo Settings" (p. 76, 77)
• To display the information of the highlighted photo

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Photo mode - 5

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Photo mode - 6
File number / Total file number

• To change the size of photos on a thumbnail screen

OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Photo mode - 7

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Photo mode - 8

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Photo mode - 9

① select

[Change Size]

② change

■ To sort by folder, recorded date or recorded month

1 Display the view selection

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the view selection - 1

(green)

2 Select the sort type

Folder view
Sort by Date
Sort by Month

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the sort type - 1

[Folder view]:

Displays the thumbnail grouped by folder

- The files which are not into a folder will be collected to the folder named "/".

[Sort by Date]:

Displays the thumbnail grouped by the same date

• The group of the photos without recorded date is shown as [Unknown].

[Sort by Month]:

Displays the thumbnail grouped by the same month

- The group of the photos without recorded date is shown as [Unknown].

3 Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 1

text_image Media Player Photo Sort by Date 2/13/2019 7/02/2019 07/11/2019 05/13/2019 10/11/2019 22/11/2019 2/31/2019 24/11/2019 01/7 22/10/03/12/2019 20/12/2019 22/12/2019 Access EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN Option Menu Slideshow View Select Drive Select Contents Select

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 2

select

thumbnail of the selected group

• To return to the thumbnail of all photos

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 3

(green)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 5

① select [All photos] ② access

• To display the information of the highlighted group

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 6

Group number / Total group number Folder name 1/12 Folder name 23/10/2010 Number of files 3 Folder name, date or month

[Single view] - Photos are displayed one at a time.

Select the file from the thumbnail of photos to be viewed

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 7

Example :

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 8

text_image Single view Single view EXIT Select RETURN Stop Rotate

Operation guide

• To display / hide the operation guide

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 9

• To return to thumbnail

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 10

• To operate Single view

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 11

text_image To the previous photo Slideshow To the next photo Stop (return to thumbnail)

• To rotate 90°

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the sorted groups to display the thumbnail of the selected group - 12

(blue)

[Slideshow] - Slideshow will complete when all photos have been viewed within the present thumbnail.

1 Select the file from the thumbnail of photos for the first view

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the file from the thumbnail of photos for the first view - 1

-select

• To display / hide the operation guide

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the file from the thumbnail of photos for the first view - 2

• To pause (return to Single view)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the file from the thumbnail of photos for the first view - 3

2 Start Slideshow

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Slideshow - 1

(red)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Slideshow - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Slideshow - 3

• To return to thumbnail

BACK/RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Slideshow - 4

Multi Shot 3D

This TV can create the 3D photo using a pair of photos in the SD Card and save it into the same SD Card.

  • This TV can also create the 3D photo from photos in the USB Flash Memory, but cannot save it.
    • This function is available with photos recorded by digital cameras.
  • Depending on the photos you select, the created 3D photo may not be suitable or the 3D photo creation may not be possible. It is recommended to take a photo (for L) and then move your camera to the right about 5 cm and take another photo (for R).
    • To view the created 3D photo with 3D effect, you need the 3D Eyewear → "Optional accessories" (p. 6)

1 Display the option menu in the thumbnail view

OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the option menu in the thumbnail view - 1

2 Select [Multi Shot 3D]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Multi Shot 3D] - 1

text_image OptionMenu SlideshowSettings Multi Shot 3D ChangeSize

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Multi Shot 3D] - 2

3 Select two photos for L (left) and R (right)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select two photos for L (left) and R (right) - 1

text_image MediaPlayer Photo Multi Shot 3D Allphotos View EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN Option Menu Select

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select two photos for L (left) and R (right) - 2

②set

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select two photos for L (left) and R (right) - 3

  • You can only select photos of the same recorded date and same pixels.
  • You may not be able to view the created 3D photo properly if you select the photos for L and R oppositely.

4Create the 3D photo

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 4Create the 3D photo - 1

  • If your selected photos are not suitable for the 3D photo, the error message will be displayed and will return to the photo selection screen (step 3).
    • To save the 3D photo in the SD Card

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 4Create the 3D photo - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 4Create the 3D photo - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 4Create the 3D photo - 4

text_image The 3D image will be saved onto your media. Continue? Yes No

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - 4Create the 3D photo - 5

①select [Yes]

②save

After finishing saving the photo, the photo selection screen will be displayed (step 3). Select photos again to create another 3D photo or exit from [Multi Shot 3D] mode.

■ To enjoy the saved 3D photos

You can enjoy viewing the saved 3D photos.

Example : Thumbnail

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To enjoy the saved 3D photos - 1

text_image Media Player Photo All photos Access EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN Option Menu Slideshow View Select Drive Select Contents Select
  • Single view (p. 74)
  • Slideshow (p. 74)

Saved 3D photo

Photo Settings

Setup the settings for Photo mode.

1 Display the option menu

OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the option menu - 1

2 Select [Slideshow Settings]

Option Menu

Slideshow Settings

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Slideshow Settings] - 1

access

3 Select the items and set

Slideshow Settings
Frame
Colour EffectOff
Transition EffectFade
AspectOriginal
Burst PlaybackOff
Interval5 seconds
RepeatOn
Back Ground Music

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the items and set - 1

select

access / store

Note

● Picture quality may become lower depending on the slideshow settings.
• Picture setting may not work depending on the slideshow settings.

MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
Slideshow SettingsFrameSelects the frame type of the slideshow[Off] / [Multi] / [Collage] / [Drift (+ calendar)] / [Drift] / [Gallery (+ calendar)] / [Gallery] / [Cinema][Multi]: 9 photos are displayed orderly at once.[Collage]: Each photo is displayed at a random position and random scale.[Drift (+ calendar)] / [Drift]:Photos are displayed like flow images.You can select to display the calendar or not. The month of calendar is turned by pressing left or right cursor button.[Gallery (+ calendar)] / [Gallery]: The various sizes of photos in the frame are displayed.You can select to display the calendar or not. The month of calendar is turned by pressing left or right cursor button.[Cinema]: Photos are displayed like old films (sepia tone)
Colour EffectSelects the colour effect of photos on Single view and Slideshow[Off] / [Sepia] / [Gray scale]This function is not available when [Frame] is set to [Drift], [Gallery] or [Cinema].
Transition EffectSelects the transition effect for switching the photo during the slideshow[Off] / [Fade] / [Slide] / [Dissolve] / [Motion] / [Random][Fade]: The next photo fades in gradually.[Slide]: The next photo slides and appears from the left side.[Dissolve]: Each photo is dissolved when switching to the next photo.[Motion]: Each photo is displayed with an effect of enlarging, reducing, moving up or moving down.[Random]: Each transition is selected at random.This function is available when [Frame] is set to [Off].
AspectSelects whether enlarged or normal viewing on Single view and Slideshow[Original] / [Zoom]This function is not available when [Frame] is set to [Collage], [Drift], [Gallery] or [Cinema].This function is not available when [Transition Effect] is set to [Motion].Depending on the photo size, it may not be fully enlarged to fill the screen, e.g. portrait style picture.
Burst PlaybackSelects whether to display burst photos in a fast-paced slideshow mode [Off] / [On]This function is not available when [Frame] is set to [Drift], [Gallery] or [Cinema].This function is not available when [Transition Effect] is set to [Motion].
IntervalSelects slideshow interval [5] / [10] / [15] / [30] / [60] / [90] / [120] (seconds)This function is not available when [Frame] is set to [Drift], [Gallery] or [Cinema].This function is not available when [Transition Effect] is set to [Motion].
Repeat Slideshow repeat [Off] / [On]
MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
Slideshow SettingsBack Ground MusicSelects the back ground music during Photo mode[Off] / [Type1] / [Type2] / [Type3] / [User] / [Auto][Type1], [Type2] and [Type3] are the fixed music each installed in this TV.[User]: Music data in the device registered by yourself will be played back.To register the music1. Select the music file 2. Select [File] or [Folder]Depending on the condition of the device, select folders until you reach the desired music file. PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 1PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 2PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 3[File]: The selected music file will be registered as back ground music.[Folder]: All the music in the folder which contains the selected music file will be registered as back ground music.PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 4.If no music has been registered or the device which has the registered music is removed, no sound will be produced.[Auto]: Music data stored in the root folder of the current device will be played back randomly.If there is no available music data, no sound will be produced.

Slideshow Settings

Change the device

You can change to the other device directly in the same mode if two or more devices are connected.

1 While the thumbnail is displayed, display the device selection

(yellow)

2 Select the device you want to access to

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Change the device - 1

text_image Media Player Photo All photos Drive Select EXIT Select RETURN Access SD Card SD Card USB HDD USB Flash...

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Change the device - 2
Selected device name

Change the contents

You can switch to the other mode of Media Player from the thumbnail view.

- The mode can be switched in the current device.

1 While the thumbnail is displayed, display the contents selection

(blue)

2 Select the contents

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Change the contents - 1

text_image Media Player Photo All photos Contents Select • EXIT • Select • RETURN Access Photo Exo Music Recorded TV 5D Card

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Change the contents - 2

[Photo] "Photo mode" (p. 73)

[Video]→“Video mode”(p.78)

[Music]→“Music mode”(p. 82)

[Recorded TV]

→ "Recorded TV mode" (p. 80)

Video and Recorded TV mode

• Supported file format (p. 107)

Video mode

(For SD Card or USB Flash Memory)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (For SD Card or USB Flash Memory) - 1

text_image MENU ASPECT EB EXIT i OK OPTION BACK/ RETURN STTL E3 DYDVCR TV Panasonic TV

■ To return to TV

EXIT

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (For SD Card or USB Flash Memory) - 2
■ To return to the previous screen

BACK/RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (For SD Card or USB Flash Memory) - 3

Note

- The structure of titles and scenes may vary depending on the digital video camera used.

The thumbnail of video titles in the SD Card or USB Flash Memory will be displayed. Example : Thumbnail - [Title view]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 1

text_image Media Player Video Trip1 3 Trip2 Trip5 Room Nature1 Nature3 Nature4 Nature5 Nature6 2010_1 2010_7Nature2 2010_9 Access EXIT Info SD Card Select RETURN Option Menu Play Contents Select Drive Select Selected device name

The preview will start when the title is highlighted if it supports a preview.

• To turn off the preview

"Video Setup" (p. 79)

- To display the information of the highlighted title

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 3

text_image File format Title 1/15 Trip1 Date & Time 19/02/2010 11:21 Number of scenes 8 Duration 00h15m39s Title number / Total title number

: Error display

: The file does not support thumbnail view.

• To view the scenes of the title Select the title

Example : Thumbnail - [Scene view]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 4

text_image Media Player Video Title view > Trip1 Imp1_1 Imp1_2 Imp1_3 Imp1_4 Imp1_5 Imp1_6 Imp1_7 Imp1_8 Play > EXIT Select RETURN Info Option Menu Play Drive Select SD Card Contents Select

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 5

The preview will start when the scene is highlighted if it supports a preview.

• To turn off the preview

→ "Video Setup" (p. 79)

- To display the information of the highlighted scene

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 6

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 7

text_image Scene Date & Time 19/02/2010 11:21 Duration 00h04m12s Trip1_1 1/8 File format Scene number / Total scene number

■ Playback from Title view

Playback of the selected title will start.

• To repeat playback "Video Setup" (p. 79)

1 Select the title
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from Title view - 1

2 Start playback
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from Title view - 2

(red)

■ Playback from the selected scene in the title (SD-Video or AVCHD)

Playback will start from the selected scene to the end of the title.

• To repeat playback "Video Setup" (p. 79)

1 Select the title
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from the selected scene in the title (SD-Video or AVCHD) - 1

2 Select the scene
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from the selected scene in the title (SD-Video or AVCHD) - 2

3 Start playback
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from the selected scene in the title (SD-Video or AVCHD) - 3

■ How to operate in the playback

Example : Playback

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 1

text_image SD 19/02/2010 11:21 00:02:35 EXIT RETURN Operation guide Information banner

• To display / hide the operation guide and information banner

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 2

• To operate the playback

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["OK"] --> B["Rewind"]
    A --> C["Pause / Playback"]
    A --> D["Fast forward"]
    A --> E["Stop"]

• To change aspect

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 4

• To the previous title / scene

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 5

(red)

• To the next title / scene

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 6

(green)

• To return to thumbnail

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 7

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 8

- You can also use the following buttons. (p. 31) Set the position to "TV"

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 9

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 10

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 11

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 12

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 13

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 14

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 15

■ To change the device → "Change the device" (p. 77)
■ To change the content in the current device → "Change the contents" (p. 77)

Video Setup

Setup the settings for Video mode.

1 Display the option menu in the thumbnail view

OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Video Setup - 1

2 Select [Video Setup]

Option Menu

Video Setup

3 Select the items and set

Video Setup Menu

Video Preview

Repeat

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Video Setup - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Video Setup - 3
access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Video Setup - 4

select

access / store

MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
Video SetupVideo PreviewSets to start the preview of the title or scene in the thumbnail view [Off] / [On]Image may not be displayed for an instant in the thumbnail view. Set the preview [Off] to resolve this.
RepeatPlayback repeat within the title or selected file (depending on the content) [Off] / [On]

■ Confirm or change the current status

You can confirm or change the current status of the content.

- Menu items and selectable options vary depending on the content.

1 Display the option menu during playback

OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Confirm or change the current status - 1

2 Select [Video Setup]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Confirm or change the current status - 2

3 Select the items and set

Video Setup Menu

Multi Audio

Stereo

Aspect Change

Aspect1

Repeat

off

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Confirm or change the current status - 3
access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Confirm or change the current status - 4

select

access / store

MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
Video SetupMulti AudioAllows you to select between selectable sound tracks (if available)It may take several seconds to change the sound.
Aspect Change[Aspect1]: Displays the content enlarged without distortion[Aspect2]: Displays the content full-screen[Original]: Displays the content original sizeYou can also change the aspect using the ASPECT button.Aspect change may not work depending on the content.

Recorded TV mode

(For USB HDD)

Contents list of the USB HDD will be displayed.

Example : Contents list
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (For USB HDD) - 1

text_image Media Player Recorded TV Remaining Capacity 500GB (50%) All Not Viewed Channel TitleDate BBC 10 Thu 28/10 Das Erste 1 12:00 ITV Mon 10/1 News 3 13:30 BBC 2 Sat 15/1 Cinema 1 13:50 Select EXIT RETURN Play Option Menu Info Chapter List Select USB I/DD-1 Delete

[All]:

All the recorded contents are listed.

[Not Viewed]:

Contents not played back are listed.

Remaining capacity of the HDD

  • This value may not be accurate depending on the condition.
  • You can also access the contents list directly by using VIERA TOOLS.

→ "How to Use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 36)

• To display the information of the highlighted content

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (For USB HDD) - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (For USB HDD) - 3

text_image - Channel DVB-T, BBC 1 - Title Das Erste - Date & Time Thu 28/10/2010 12:00 - Duration 00:20

G : Appears when the recorded content has the guidance information (parental rating, etc.) or the channel of the content is restricted by Child Lock.

This content requires entering PIN number to playback.

P : Content not played back (Once you playback the content, this icon will disappear.)
● : Content under recording (You can playback this content even if under recording.)
: Protected content cannot be deleted.
: Two or more contents are grouped.

■ Playback the content from the list

1 Select the content
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback the content from the list - 1

2 Start playback
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback the content from the list - 2

- If you stopped the last playback on the way, the confirmation screen asking whether you wish to start from the last stopped part or beginning will be displayed. Select your desired option.

■ To edit recording content [Create Group] / [Release Group] / [Change Protect Status]

1 Select and tick the content to edit
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit recording content [Create Group] / [Release Group] / [Change Protect Status] - 1

2 Display the option menu
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit recording content [Create Group] / [Release Group] / [Change Protect Status] - 2

3 Select the item and edit

Option Menu
Create Group
Release Group
Exclude from Group
Change Protect Status

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To edit recording content [Create Group] / [Release Group] / [Change Protect Status] - 3

[Create Group]:

Two or more contents can be grouped. Select and tick all the desired contents, and then select [Create Group].

[Release Group] :

Select the created group you want to release, and then select [Release Group]. (To release several groups at once, tick all the desired groups.)

[Exclude from Group]:

Select the group and press the OK button to display the grouped contents. To exclude only the specific content from the group, select it and then select [Exclude from Group]. (To exclude several contents at once, tick all the desired contents.)

[Change Protect Status]:

Select the content you want to protect to delete, and then select [Change Protect Status]. Perform the same way to cancel the protection. (To change the status of several contents at once, tick all the desired contents.)

■ Delete the selected content

1 Select the content
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Delete the selected content - 1

2 Delete the content
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Delete the selected content - 2

3 Confirm
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Delete the selected content - 3

text_image Delete Are you sure you want to delete ? Yes No

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Delete the selected content - 4

• To select two or more contents

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Delete the selected content - 5

■ How to operate in the playback

Example : Playback

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 1

text_image Das ErsteUSB 00.15:38 00002005 Manual skip RETURN Chapter List & Repeat Operation guide Information banner

• To display / hide the operation guide and information banner

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 2

• To operate the playback

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 3

flowchart
graph TD
    A["OK"] --> B["[Manual skip"]]
    B --> C["Press to skip forward a"]
    B --> D["Press and hold to skip"]
    A --> E["Pause / Playback"]
    A --> F["Fast forward"]
    A --> G["Stop"]
    H["Rewind"] --> A

- To repeat between the starting point "A" and finishing point "B"

Set "A" and "B" in order

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 4

(blue)

- The points will be reset by pressing this button again or other operations.

• To change aspect

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 5

• To display the subtitle (if available)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 6

• To the previous chapter

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 7

• To the next chapter

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 8

• To return to list

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 9

- You can also use the following buttons. (p. 31)

Set the position to "TV"

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 10

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 11

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 12

- To confirm or change the current status (if available) "Display the selectable settings for the current status" (p. 20)

Chapter List

You can start playback from the chapter list you select.

- A recorded content is automatically divided into chapters (about five minutes for each).

- The chapter list is not displayed while the selected content is being recorded.

To play back from the chapter list

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Chapter List - 1

(yellow)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Chapter List - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Chapter List - 3

natural_image Black-and-white photo of white tulips with a blurred background (no text or symbols visible)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Chapter List - 4

① select

② playback

Note

- Depending on the recorded programmes, some playback operations may not work properly.

■ Change the device

You can change to the other device directly in the same mode if two or more devices are connected.

1 Display the option menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the option menu - 1

2 Select [Drive Select]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Drive Select] - 1

text_image Option Menu Create Group Release Group Drive Select Contents Select Change Protect Status

3 Select the device you want to access to

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the device you want to access to - 1

text_image Drive Select EXIT Select RETURN Access SD Card USB HDD1 SB Flash1 USB HDD1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the device you want to access to - 2

If you select the SD Card or USB Flash Memory, also change the contents to enjoy photo, video or music.

• To change the content

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the device you want to access to - 3

OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the device you want to access to - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the device you want to access to - 5

① select [Contents Select]

②access

Audio output Settings

You can enjoy the multi-channel sound via an amplifier connected to DIGITAL AUDIO OUT or HDMI2 (ARC function) terminal. To confirm or change the current sound status "Confirm or change the current status" (p. 79)

1 Display the menu
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Audio output Settings - 1

2 Select [Sound]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Audio output Settings - 2

text_image VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

3 Select [SPDIF Selection] and set
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Audio output Settings - 3

text_image SPDIF Selection Auto Reset to Defaults Reset

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Audio output Settings - 4
select
access / store

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Audio output Settings - 5
① select
② access

MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
SPDIF SelectionSPDIF : A standard audio transfer file formatSelects the initial setting for digital audio output signal from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT and HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals [Auto] / [PCM][Auto] : Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital and HE-AAC (48 kHz) multi-channel are output as Dolby Digital Bitstream.DTS is output as DTS.MPEG is output as PCM.[PCM] : Digital output signal is fixed to PCM.

Music mode

• Supported file format (p. 108)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Music mode - 1

text_image EXIT i OK OPTION BACKI RETURN

The thumbnail of music folders in the SD Card or USB Flash Memory will be displayed. Example: Thumbnail - [Folder view]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Music mode - 2

text_image Media Player Music Folder view My Music 1 My Music 2 My Music 3 Access EXIT Info SD Card—Selected device name Select RETURN Option Menu Play Folder Drive Select Contents Select

• To display the information of the highlighted folder

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Music mode - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Music mode - 4
Folder number / Total folder number
To return to TV

EXIT

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Music mode - 5

To return to the previous screen

BACK/ETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Music mode - 6

■ Playback from Folder view

All the files in the selected folder will be played back.

1 Select the folder
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from Folder view - 1

2 Start playback
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from Folder view - 2

■ Playback from File view

Selected file will be played back.

1 Select the folder
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from File view - 1
2 Select the file

Example : Thumbnail - File view

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from File view - 2

text_image Media Player Music Folder view > My Music_1 My Song_1 Song_2 My Song_3 My Song_4 My Song_5 My Song_6 My Song_7 My Song 9 My Song 10 My Song 11 My Song 8 Play EXIT Info SD Card Select Return Option Menu Play Folder Drive Select Contents Select

3 Start playback
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from File view - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from File view - 4

• To display the information of the highlighted file

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ Playback from File view - 5

text_image 1/11 File number / Total file number Title My Song_1 Album My Music_1 Artist My Favourite Track No. 1 Duration 00h03m29s

■ How to operate in the playback

Example : Playback

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 1

text_image My Song_9 My Favourite My Music 1 00:02.43 / 00:05.44 EXIT RETURN

Operation guide

• To display / hide the operation guide

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 2

• To operate the playback

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 3

Rewind

Pause / Playback

Fast forward

Stop

• To the previous track

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 4

(red)

• To the next track

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 5

(green)

• To return to thumbnail

BACK

RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ How to operate in the playback - 6

■ To change the device → "Change the device" (p. 77)
■ To change the content in the current device ➤ "Change the contents" (p. 77)

Music Setup

Setup the setting for Music mode (only available in the thumbnail view).

1 Display the option menu

OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Music Setup - 1

2 Select [Music Setup]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Music Setup - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Music Setup - 3

3 Set
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Music Setup - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Music Setup - 5

select

access / store

[Folder]: Playback repeat within the selected folder

[One]: Playback repeat of the selected one file

Using Network Services (DLNA / VIERA Connect / freesat)

DLNA®

This TV is a DLNA Certified™ product.

DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) is a standard that makes DLNA Certified digital electronics easier and more convenient to use on a home network. To learn more, visit www.dlna.org.

It allows you to share photos, videos and music stored in the DLNA Certified media server (for example, PC with windows 7 installed, DIGA Recorder etc.) connected to your home network, and enjoy the contents on the TV screen.

It also allows you to control the TV with the DLNA certified equipment connected to your home network (DLNA Remote Control).

  • For the supported file format (p. 107, 108)
  • AVCHD and DivX files are not supported by DLNA, but can be played by Media Player (p. 72).

Media server

Store photos, videos or music into the DLNA Certified media server, and then you can enjoy them on the TV.

To use a PC as a media server

Prepare the PC with Windows 7 or ensure the server software is installed on the PC.

"Windows 7" and "TwonkyMedia server 6 (installed on the PC with Windows 7, Windows Vista or Windows XP)" are the server software that has been tested for compatibility with this TV (current as of January, 2011). Any other server software have not been tested with this TV, therefore compatibility and performance cannot be assured.

- Windows 7

The setup for homegroup settings of Windows 7 is required. For details, refer to the help functions of Windows 7.

•TwonkyMedia server

"TwonkyMedia server" is the product of PacketVideo Corporation.

To obtain the Installation Guides for installing and setting "TwonkyMedia server", visit the website of TwonkyMedia.

Additional fees may be charged to obtain server software.

Note

  • For more information about the server software, please consult each software company.
  • When server software for the media server is installed on the PC, the data may be at risk of being accessed by other people. Please take care of the settings and connections under the network circumstances at the office, hotel or even at home when not using a router.

To use a DLNA compatible DIGA Recorder as a media server

By connecting a DLNA compatible DIGA Recorder to your home network, you can enjoy and control it as one of the media servers.

- Please refer to the manual of your DIGA Recorder to confirm whether the recorder is compatible with DLNA.

■ DLNA Remote Control

You can control the TV with the DLNA certified equipment.

• To use this function, set the [Network Link Settings] (p. 86)
- "Windows 7" is the OS that has been tested for compatibility of this TV (current as of January, 2011). For the operations, refer to the help functions of Windows 7.

Network connection "Example 1" or "Example 2" in "Network connections" (p. 85)

Network setup → (p. 86 - 90)

DLNA operations (p. 91 - 94)

VIERA Connect

VIERA Connect is a gateway to the internet services unique to Panasonic and has expanded VIERA CAST features greatly. VIERA Connect allows you to access some specific websites supported by Panasonic, and enjoy internet contents such as photos, videos, games, etc. from VIERA Connect home screen.

- This TV has no full browser function and all features of websites may not be available.

Network connection → "Example 1" or "Example 3" in "Network connections" (p. 85)

Network setup → (p. 86 - 90)

VIERA Connect operations → (p. 17, 94)

freesat

freesat may give you access to the interactive services and features through an internet connection.

- Please contact broadcasters for availability of services.

Network connections

To use only DLNA features, you can operate the features without broadband network environment.

To use VIERA Connect features or freesat interactive services, you need a broadband network environment.

  • If you do not have any broadband network services, please consult your retailer for assistance.
  • Set up and connect any equipment required for the network environment. You cannot make settings for the equipment on this TV. Read the manual of the equipment.
  • Required speed (effective): at least 1.5 Mbps for SD and 6 Mbps for HD picture quality, respectively. If the transfer speed is not enough, contents may not be played back properly.

Example 1
(For DLNA and VIERA Connect)
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Network connections - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Computer"] -->|Wired connection| B["LAN cable"]
    B --> C["Modem"]
    C --> D["Internet"]
    E["Wireless connection"] --> F["USB 2"]
    F --> G["Wireless LAN Adaptor and Extension cable"]
    G --> H["&quot;Optional accessories&quot; (p. 6)"]
    H --> I["Connect to the USB 1, 2 or 3 port."]
    I --> J["Access point"]
    J --> K["Modem Hub or Router"]
    K --> L["DLNA Certified media server (for example, PC, DIGA Recorder, etc.)"]
  • Ensure to use a LAN straight cable for this connection.
  • If your modem has no broadband router functions, use a broadband router.
  • If your modem has broadband router functions but there are no vacant ports, use a hub.
  • Ensure that the broadband routers and hubs are compatible with 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX.
  • If you use the equipment compatible only with 100BASE-TX, category 5 LAN cables are required.

Example 2

(For DLNA)

You can connect the TV and the equipment directly to use DLNA features.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (For DLNA) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Computer"] --> B["Ethernet"]
    B --> C["LAN cable"]
    C --> D["DLNA Certified media server (for example, PC, DIGA Recorder, etc.)"]

- Ensure to use a LAN cross cable for this connection.

Example 3

(For VIERA Connect)

You can connect the TV and the telecommunication equipment directly to use VIERA Connect features.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - (For VIERA Connect) - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Computer"] --> B["Ethernet"]
    B --> C["LAN cable"]
    C --> D["Internet"]

Note

  • Contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) telecommunications company for further assistance regarding the network equipment.
  • Confirm the terms and conditions of the contracts with your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or telecommunications company. Depending on the contracts, additional fees may be charged or multiple connections to the internet may be impossible.

Network Setup

- Ensure the connections are completed before starting Network Setup. "Network connections" (p. 85)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Network Setup - 1

1

Display the menu

2

Select [Setup]

3

Select [Network Setup]

To return to TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Network Setup] - 1

Settings which allow the TV to be controlled by the equipment connected to the network.

1 Select [Network Link Settings]

Network Setup
Connection Test
Network Type Wired
Access Point Settings---
IP/DNS Settings
Network Link SettingsAccess
Software Update
MAC Addressab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Network Link settings - 1

①select

②access

2 Select the items and set

Network Link Settings
VIERA NameVIERA
DLNA Remote ControlOn
DLNA Remote VolumeOn
Network Remote ControlOn

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Network Link settings - 2

select

change

access / store

MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
Network Link SettingsVIERA NameSets your favourite name for this TV and this name will be used to display the name of this TV on the screen of the other DLNA compatible equipment.
DLNA Remote ControlEnables to control the TV using Windows 7 via the network [Off] / [On]
DLNA Remote VolumeEnables to control the volume of the TV using Windows 7 via the network [Off] / [On]
Network Remote ControlEnables to control the TV from the network equipment (Smartphone, etc.) [Off] / [On]Depending on the area, this function may not be available. For details, consult your local Panasonic dealer.For more information of this function, visit the following website.http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/

Wired connection settings

This setting is for the network connection by using the LAN cable.

1 Select [Network Type] and set to [Wired]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Network Type] and set to [Wired] - 1

text_image Network Setup Connection Test Network Type Wired Access Point Settings --- IP/DNS Settings Network Link Settings Software Update MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Network Type] and set to [Wired] - 2

select

access / store

If you make the network connection like "Example 2" (p. 85), you do not have to set [Acquire DNS Address], [Proxy] and [Proxy Port].

2 Select [IP/DNS Settings] and set the items

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [IP/DNS Settings] and set the items - 1

text_image Network Setup IP/DNS Settings

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [IP/DNS Settings] and set the items - 2

① select

② access

■ [Acquire IP Address] / [Acquire DNS Address]

Sets [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], [Gateway], [Primary DNS] and [Secondary DNS].

Select [Acquire IP Address] / [Acquire DNS Address] and set to [Auto] (recommended)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ [Acquire IP Address] / [Acquire DNS Address] - 1

text_image IP/DNS Settings Acquire IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Acquire DNS Address Auto DNS Address Proxy Settings

- The available settings are displayed automatically.

Manual settings

([IP Address], [Subnet Mask], [Gateway], [Primary DNS], [Secondary DNS])

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ [Acquire IP Address] / [Acquire DNS Address] - 2

select

access / store

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ [Acquire IP Address] / [Acquire DNS Address] - 3
0

3 Select [Proxy Settings] and set the items

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Proxy Settings] and set the items - 1

text_image IP/DNS Settings Acquire IP Address Auto IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Acquire DNS Address Auto DNS Address Proxy Settings Access

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Proxy Settings] and set the items - 2

① select

② access

• After settings, return to [Network Setup] screen

BACK/RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Proxy Settings] and set the items - 3

[Proxy]

Sets Proxy address.

- This is the address of the relay server that is connected to the target server instead of the browser and sends data to the browser. Setting is required if specified by the provider.

  1. Select [Proxy] 2. Enter the address 3. Store

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Proxy] - 1

text_image Proxy Settings Proxy Proxy Port 0

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Proxy] - 2

text_image Proxy Host A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + - - a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { } + - - * _

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Proxy] - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Proxy] - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [Proxy] - 5

• To use numeric buttons

"Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 110)

[Proxy Port]

Sets Proxy port number.

- This number is also specified by the provider with the Proxy address.

1. Select [Proxy Port]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Proxy Port] - 1

text_image Proxy Settings Proxy Proxy Port 0

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Proxy Port] - 2

2. Move the cursor and enter the number

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Move the cursor and enter the number - 1

4 Select [Connection Test] and access to test

Network Setup
Connection TestAccess
Network TypeWired
Access Point Settings---
IP/DNS Settings
Network Link Settings
Software Update
MAC Addressab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Connection Test] and access to test - 1

- Performs automatic testing of the network connection for the TV. (It takes a while to test.)

Connection Test

Check network cable connection.
Check acquired IP address.
Check for devices using same IP address.
Check gateway connection.
Check server connection for VIERA Connect.

: succeeded

The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.

:failed

Check the settings and connections, and then perform this function again.

Wireless connection settings

This setting is for the network connection by using the Wireless LAN Adaptor. (Wireless connection)

- Confirm the encryption key, settings and positions of your access point before starting setup. For details, read the manual of the access point.

1 Select [Network Type] and set to [Wireless]

Network Setup
Connection Test
Network TypeWireless
Access Point SettingsNo settings
IP/DNS Settings
Network Link Settings
Software Update
MAC Addressab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Network Type] and set to [Wireless] - 1

2 Select [Access Point Settings]

Network Setup
Connection Test
Network TypeWireless
Access Point SettingsNo settings
IP/DNS Settings
Network Link Settings
Software Update
MAC Addressab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Access Point Settings] - 1

3 Select the connection type and set

Connection TypePlease select network connection type.
WPS(Push button)
WPS(PIN)
Search for access point
Manual

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the connection type and set - 1

  • For details of each connection type (p. 89, 90)
  • After settings, return to [Network Setup] screen

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the connection type and set - 2

4 Confirm the connection status of [Access Point Settings]

Network Setup
Connection Test
Network TypeWireless
Access Point SettingsConnected
IP/DNS Settings
Network Link Settings
Software Update
MAC Addressab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

---: [Wired] is selected in [Network Type].

[No adaptor]: Wireless LAN Adaptor is not connected.

[No settings] : Setting for connecting to the access point has not been set.

[Connecting...] : Connecting to the access point in progress.

[Connected]: Wireless connection to the access point succeeded

  • To display the current access point settings, press the OK button. To change the settings, select [No] on this screen.
  • Some access points do not allow access to the internet. Perform [Connection Test] (p. 89) to check if internet connection is available.

[USB overcurrent] : Overcurrent error → (p. 116)

5 Select [Connection Test] and access to test

Network Setup

Connection Test
Network TypeWireless
Access Point SettingsConnected
IP/DNS Settings
Network Link Settings
Software Update
MAC Addressab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Connection Test] and access to test - 1

Performs automatic testing of the network connection for the TV. (It takes a while to test.)

Connection Test

Check access point connection.
Check acquired IP address.
Check for devices using same IP address.
Check gateway connection.
Check server connection for VIERA Connect.

: succeeded

The test is successful and the TV is connected to the network.

:failed

Check the settings and connections, and then perform this function again. If you continue to have difficulty, please contact your internet service provider.

■ [WPS(Push button)]

WPS(Push button)

1) Please press the 'WPS' button on the access point until its light flashes.
2) When the light is flashing select 'Connect' on TV.
If you are unsure, please check the instruction manual of the access point.

Connect

① press the WPS button on the access point until the light flashes

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ [WPS(Push button)] - 1

② connect the Wireless LAN Adaptor and the access point

  • Ensure that your access point supports WPS for this setup.
    • WPS : Wi-Fi Protected Setup™

[WPS(PIN)]

1 Select your desired access point

Available Access Points
No.V6@loss type Encrypt Reception
1Access Point A11n(2.4GHz)Bunlll
2Access Point B11n(5GHz)Bunllll
3Access Point C11n(5GHz)unllll

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [WPS(PIN)] - 1

- Ensure that your access point supports WPS for this setup.

• To search access points again

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [WPS(PIN)] - 2

(yellow)

- For the information of the highlighted access point

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [WPS(PIN)] - 3

• To set manually

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [WPS(PIN)] - 4

(red)

2 Enter the PIN code to the access point, and then select [Connect]

WPS(PIN)

Please register the following PIN codes on the access point.

PIN code: 12345678

Select 'Connect' after entering and saving the settings on the access point.

Connect

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter the PIN code to the access point, and then select [Connect] - 1

■ [Search for access point]

Access points found automatically are listed.

1 Select your desired access point

Available Access Points
No.Netball type Encrypt Reception
1Access Point A11n(2.4GHz)Bunll
2Access Point B11n(5GHz)Bunll
3Access Point C11n(5GHz)unll

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ [Search for access point] - 1

- Encrypted access point

• To search access points again

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ [Search for access point] - 2

(yellow)

- For the information of the highlighted access point

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ [Search for access point] - 3

• To set manually

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ [Search for access point] - 4

2 Access the encryption key input mode

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Access the encryption key input mode - 1

text_image Encryption Key Setting Connection will be made with the following settings:- SSID : Access Point A Authentication type : WPA-PSK Encryption type : TKIP Please input the encryption key. Encryption key

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Access the encryption key input mode - 2

- If the selected access point is not encrypted, the confirmation screen will be displayed. It is recommended to select the encrypted access point.

3 Enter the encryption key of the access point (Set characters one by one)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter the encryption key of the access point (Set characters one by one) - 1

text_image Access Point Settings Encryption key ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ01234567891e4 abcd=fghklmnoparst uvwxyz()--.*

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter the encryption key of the access point (Set characters one by one) - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Enter the encryption key of the access point (Set characters one by one) - 3

- To use numeric buttons → "Characters table for numeric buttons" (p. 110)

4 Select [Yes]

Access Point Settings
Encryption key is set to- XXXXXXXXX
Select 'Yes' to confirm. Select 'No' to change.
YesNo

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Yes] - 1

- To re-enter the encryption key, select [No].

■ [Manual]

You can setup SSID, authentication type, encryption type, and encryption key manually. Follow the on screen instructions and set manually.

- When you use 11n (5 GHz) for the wireless system between the Wireless LAN Adaptor and access point, please select [AES] for the encryption type.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ [Manual] - 1

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Access Point Settings\nPlease input the SSID."] --> B["SSID Setting\nSSID is set to:-\nXXXXXXXX\nSelect 'Yes' to confirm.\nSelect 'No' to change."]
    B --> C["Authentication Type Settings\nConnection will be made with the following settings:-\nSSID : XXXXXXX\nPlease select the authentication type."]
    C --> D["WPA2-PSK\nWPA-PSK\nShared key\nOpen"]

Update TV's software

Check for available software updates from the Panasonic website.

Select [Software Update]

Network Setup
Connection Test
Network TypeWired
Access Point Settings-
IP/DNS Settings
Network Link Settings
Software UpdateAccess
MAC Addressab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Software Update] - 1

- Follow the on screen instructions

Note

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 1

text_image Network Setup : MAC Address ab-cd-ef-gh-ij-kl

[MAC Address]

- MAC address is a unique address that identifies hardware in the network. (for information only)

Using DLNA® features

  • Ensure the preparation of media server, network connections and network settings are completed.
    "Media server" (p. 84), "Network connections" (p. 85), [Network Setup] (p. 86 - 90)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Using DLNA® features - 1

text_image MENU ASPECT i VIERA TOOLS OK OPTION BACKI RETURN Panasonic TV

To return to TV

EXIT

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Using DLNA® features - 2

To return to the previous screen

BACK

RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Using DLNA® features - 3

1

Display icons of the feature

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display icons of the feature - 1

2

Select [Media Server]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Media Server] - 1

text_image NEW MEDIA POSTO VETO RECEIVED BY MIL Media Server

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Media Server] - 2

3

Select one of the media servers you want to access

Example : Media server list

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the media servers you want to access - 1

text_image Media Server SPG/SPGT SPG/BPZ SPG/BPS SPA 2000 OUT 100% Status SPG/SPGT SPG/BPZ SPG/BPS SPA 2000 OUT 100%

Available media servers

Total listed number

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the media servers you want to access - 2

① select

② access

• To display the information of the highlighted media server

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select one of the media servers you want to access - 3

4

Select the file

Example : File list

Media Server
Solutions2010-09-05 09:54
New Service2010-13-2010-11-20 13:76
2010-16-2010-12-20 11:51
2010-21-2010-12-10 15:29
2010-25-2010-12-12 13:39
2010-27-2010-12-22 14:53
2010-29-2011-9-05 13:32
2010-30-052011-9-12 15:56
2011-30-022011-9-22 16:38
2011-30-342011-9-28 14:48
2011-30-382011-9-30 14:36

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the file - 1

① select

② access

  • Depending on the condition of media server, you may need to select the folder before selecting the file.
    • To display the information of the highlighted file

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the file - 2

Note

• Non-playable files are also listed but cannot be selected.
- Turn the TV off, and then on again when changing or reconnecting the network connection.

For photo file

[Single view] - Photos are displayed one at a time.

Example :

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For photo file - 1

text_image Single view Single view EXIT Select RETURN Stop Operation guide Rotate

• To display / hide the operation guide

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For photo file - 2

• To operate Single view

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For photo file - 3

To the previous photo

To the next photo

Slideshow

Stop

(return to list)

• To return to list

BACK/

RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For photo file - 4

- To rotate 90^

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For photo file - 5

(blue)

[Slideshow] - Slideshow will complete when all photos have been viewed within the list.

1 Select the photo file from the list for the first view

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the photo file from the list for the first view - 1

• To display / hide the operation guide

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the photo file from the list for the first view - 2

• To pause (return to Single view)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the photo file from the list for the first view - 3

2 Start Slideshow

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Slideshow - 1

(red)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Slideshow - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Slideshow - 3

• To return to list

BACK/RETURN

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Start Slideshow - 4

For video file

Playback- Playback will start.

Example : Playback

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For video file - 1

text_image 00:02:59 19/02/2010 11:21 00:02:59 Manual skip EXIT RETURN

Operation guide

Information banner

• To display / hide the operation guide and information banner

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For video file - 2

• To the previous content

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For video file - 3

(red)

• To the next content

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For video file - 4

(green)

• To change aspect

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For video file - 5

• To operate the playback

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For video file - 6

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Start"] --> B{Decision}
    B -->|Yes| C["OK"]
    B -->|No| D["End"]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For video file - 7

Rewind

[Manual skip]

  • Press to skip forward about 30 seconds
  • Press and hold to skip backward about 15 seconds

//▶ Pause / Playback

Fast forward

Stop

• To return to list

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For video file - 8

For music file

Playback - Playback will start

Example : Playback

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For music file - 1

text_image My Song_9 My Favourite My Music_1 00:02.43 / 00:05.44 EXIT RETURN

Operation guide

• To display / hide the operation guide

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For music file - 2

• To operate the playback

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For music file - 3

Rewind

Pause / Playback

Fast forward

Stop

• To the previous track

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For music file - 4

(red)

• To the next track

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For music file - 5

(green)

• To return to list

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For music file - 6

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - For music file - 7

For DIGA Recorder

Control the DIGA Recorder

The screen of the DIGA Recorder will be displayed. You can control the functions of the DIGA Recorder with this TV remote control according to the operation guide.

Example :
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Control the DIGA Recorder - 1

text_image DIRECT NAVIGATOR (Grouped Tools) All Time Summary 2017-06 Video: DVD Library TV Film (or Web) - Web Bibel TV/Sibel TV class Geography WOR Author WOR Text WOR School WOR Manager OK RETURN OFFICE Pages: 000506 Action Trackout
  • Before operating, register this TV on the DIGA Recorder.
  • For details, read the manual of the DIGA Recorder.

Option menu for each content

Setup the settings for Photo, Video and Music file operations.

1 Display the option menu

OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the option menu - 1

2 Select [Slideshow Settings], [Video Setup] or [Music Setup]

Option Menu
Slideshow Settings
Video Setup
Music Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Slideshow Settings], [Video Setup] or [Music Setup] - 1

3 Select the items and set

Slideshow Settings
Transition EffectFade
Interval5 seconds
RepeatOn
Back Ground Music
Video Setup Menu
Video PreviewOn
RepeatOff

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the items and set - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the items and set - 2

select

access / store

MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
Slideshow SettingsTransition EffectSelects the transition effect for switching the photo during the slideshow [Off] / [Fade] / [Slide] / [Dissolve] / [Motion] / [Random] [Fade]: The next photo fades in gradually. [Slide]: The next photo slides and appears from the left side. [Dissolve]: Each photo is dissolved when switching to the next photo. [Motion]: Each photo is displayed with an effect of enlarging, reducing, moving up or moving down. [Random]: Each transition is selected at random.
IntervalSelects slideshow interval [5] / [10] / [15] / [30] / [60] / [90] / [120] (seconds) • This function is not available when [Transition Effect] is set to [Motion].
Repeat Slideshow repeat [Off] / [On]
Back Ground MusicSelects the back ground music during Photo mode [Off] / [Type1] / [Type2] / [Type3]
Video SetupVideo PreviewSets to start the preview of the title or scene in the thumbnail screen [Off] / [On] • Image may not be displayed for an instant in the thumbnail screen. Set the preview [Off] to resolve this.
Repeat Playback repeat within the selected file [Off] / [On]
Music SetupRepeatPlayback repeat [Off] / [Folder] / [One] [Folder]: Playback repeat within the selected folder [One]: Playback repeat of the selected one file

Audio output settings (for video contents)

You can enjoy the multi-channel sound via an amplifier connected to DIGITAL AUDIO OUT or HDMI2 (ARC function) terminal.

- To confirm or change the current sound status "Confirm or change the current status" (p. 79)

1 Display the menu

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display the menu - 1

2 Select [Sound]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Sound] - 1

text_image VIEW Main Menu Picture Sound Timer Setup

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Sound] - 2

① select

② access

3 Select [SPDIF Selection] and set

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [SPDIF Selection] and set - 1

text_image 2/2 SPDIF Selection Auto Reset to Defaults Reset

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [SPDIF Selection] and set - 2

select

access / store

MenuItem Adjustments / Configurations (alternatives)
SoundSPDIF SelectionSPDIF : A standard audio transfer file formatSelects the initial setting for digital audio output signal from DIGITAL AUDIO OUT and HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals [Auto] / [PCM][Auto] : Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital and HE-AAC (48 kHz) multi-channel are output as Dolby Digital Bitstream.MPEG is output as PCM.[PCM] : Digital output signal is fixed to PCM.

VIERA Connect

You can access VIERA Connect and enjoy various network contents.

  • VIERA Connect requires a broadband internet connection. Dial-up internet connections cannot be used.
  • Ensure the network connections and network settings are completed. "Network connections" (p. 85), [Network Setup] (p. 86 - 90)
  • For details about VIERA Connect operation "Using "VIERA Connect" (p. 17)
  • Setup menu (Items in [Setup] may change without notice.)
Customize HomeScreen Changes the position of each services on VIERA Connect home screen
My Account Confirms or removes the account information of the TV you entered on VIERA Connect
Lock Sets to restrict access to some services
Beep Sets beep sound On or Off when operating VIERA Connect
Notices Displays the information of VIERA Connect

Note

  • Be sure to update the software when a software update notice is displayed on the TV screen. If the software is not updated, you will not be able to use VIERA Connect.
    You can update the software later manually [Software Update] in [Network Setup] (p. 90)
    • VIERA Connect home screen is subject to change without notice.
  • The services through VIERA Connect are operated by their respective service providers, and service may be discontinued either temporarily or permanently without notice. Therefore, Panasonic will make no warranty for the content or the continuity of the services.
  • Some content may be inappropriate for some viewers.
  • Some content may only be available for specific countries and may be presented in specific languages.
  • Depending on the connection environment, the internet connection may be slow or may not be successful.
  • During the operation, audio signal is output from AV1, AUDIO OUT, DIGITAL AUDIO OUT and HDMI2 (ARC function) terminals. But no video signals are output. AV1 can output audio signal if [AV1 out] is set to [Monitor] in the Setup Menu (p. 41). To use HDMI2 with ARC function, connect an amplifier that has ARC function (p. 96) and set to use theatre speakers (p. 102).
  • You can restrict access to VIERA Connect [Child Lock] (p. 60)
  • Turn the TV off, and then on again when changing or reconnecting the network connection.

Q-Link connects the TV and DVD Recorder / VCR, and enables easy recording, playback, etc. (p. 97)

VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™) connects the TV and the equipment with VIERA Link function, and enables easy control, convenient recording, playback, energy saving, creation of a home theatre, etc., without complicated setting. (p. 98 - 102) You can use Q-Link and VIERA Link functions together.

  • This TV supports "HDAVI Control 5" function. But available features are depending on the connected equipment's version of HDAVI Control. Please refer to the manual of the equipment to confirm the version.
  • VIERA Link features may be available even with other manufacturers' equipment supporting HDMI CEC.

Q-Link (SCART connection only)

Features\Connected equipmentDVD Recorder / VCR with Q-Link function
Analogue channel download
Easy playback
Power on link
Power off link
Direct TV Recording

Connection
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 1

text_image SCART cable

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 2
DVD Recorder / VCR with Q-Link function

  • Use a fully wired SCART cable.
  • Connect the DVD Recorder / VCR supporting Q-Link to the TV's AV1 terminal via a SCART cable.

VIERA Link (HDMI connection only)

Features\Connected equipmentDIGA Recorder with VIERA Link functionDVD Player / Blu-ray Disc Player with VIERA Link functionHD Video Camera / LUMIX Camera with VIERA Link function
Analogue channel download -- --
Easy playback
Power on link
Power off link
Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby○*3○*3-
Auto standby for unnecessary equipment○*3○*3-
Pause Live TV programme○*3*4--
Direct TV Recording○*3--
Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control○*1○*1○*1
Speaker control -- --

Connection
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 3

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Computer"] -->|HDMI cable| B["Camera"]
    B --> C["DIGA Recorder / DVD Player / Blu-ray Disc Player / HD Video Camera / LUMIX Camera with VIERA Link function"]
  • Use a fully wired HDMI compliant cable.
  • Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's HDMI1 or HDMI2 terminal via an HDMI cable.
  • For information about using HDMI cables for connecting Panasonic HD Video Camera or LUMIX Camera, read the manual of the equipment.

VIERA Link (HDMI and SCART connections)

Features\Connected equipmentDIGA Recorder with VIERA Link function
Analogue channel download
Easy playback
Power on link
Power off link
Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby○*3
Auto standby for unnecessary equipment○*3
Pause Live TV programme○*2 *4
Direct TV Recording○*2
Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control○*1
Speaker control –

Connection
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 4

flowchart
graph LR
    A["TV"] --> B["HDMI cable"]
    B <--> C["SCART cable"]
    C <--> D["DIGA Recorder with VERA Line function"]
  • Use a fully wired HDMI compliant cable.
  • Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's HDMI1 or HDMI2 terminal via an HDMI cable.
    • Use a fully wired SCART cable.
  • Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's AV1 terminal via a SCART cable.

VIERA Link (HDMI and Audio out connections)

Features\Connected equipmentPlayer theatre with VIERA Link functionBlu-ray Disc theatre with VIERA Link functionAmplifier with VIERA Link function
Analogue channel download ---
Easy playback *5 *5 -
Power on link -
Power off link
Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby- *3 -
Auto standby for unnecessary equipment *3 *6 *3 *6 *3
Pause Live TV programme ---
Direct TV Recording ---
Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control *1 *1 -
Speaker control

Connection
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features - 5

flowchart
graph LR
    A["Monitor"] -->|HDMI cable| B["SCART cable"]
    B --> C["Optical digital audio cable"]
    B --> D["RCA cable"]
    B --> E["SCART cable"]
    C --> F["Player theatre / Blu-ray Disc theatre with VIERA Link function"]
    D --> G["To use Amplifier : Amplifier with VIERA Link function"]
    E --> H["SCART cable"]
    F --> I["Speaker system"]
    G --> J["Speaker system"]
    H --> K["DIGA Recorder with VIERA Link function"]
    I --> L["Speaker system"]
    J --> M["HDMI cable"]
    K --> N["HDMI cable"]

HD Video Camera / LUMIX Camera with VIERA Link function

  • Use fully wired HDMI compliant cable.
  • Connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 terminal via an HDMI cable.
    • Use fully wired SCART cable.
  • If you use a SCART cable for audio output, connect the equipment supporting VIERA Link to the TV's AV1 terminal and set [AV1 out] to [Monitor] in the Setup Menu (p. 41).
  • Use the optical digital audio cable, RCA cable or SCART cable for audio output from the TV.

*1 : Available with the equipment which has "HDAVI Control 2 or later" function.
*2: Available with the equipment which has "HDAVI Control 3 or later" function.
*3 : Available with the equipment which has "HDAVI Control 4 or later" function.
*4: Available with DIGA Recorder which has HDD.

*5: While playing a disc
*6: Except for watching a disc
*7: If the connected equipment has "HDAVI Control 5" function, you do not have to use this audio cable (Optical digital audio cable, RCA cable or SCART cable). In this case, connect the equipment to the TV's HDMI2 terminal via an HDMI cable.

• Table below displays maximum number of compatible equipment that can be controlled by VIERA Link Control.
This includes connections to equipment already connected to the TV.
For example, DIGA Recorder connected to Amplifier which is connected to the TV via an HDMI cable.

Type of the equipment Maximum number
Recorder (DIGA Recorder, etc.) 3
Player (DVD Player, Blu-ray Disc Player, HD Video Camera, LUMIX Camera, Digital Camera, Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre, etc.)3
Audio system (Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre, Amplifier, etc.) 1
Tuner (Set top box, etc.) 4

Preparations

- Connect the DVD Recorder / VCR with the following logos:

"Q-Link", "NEXTVIEWLINK", "DATA LOGIC (a trademark of Metz Corporation)", "Easy Link (a trademark of Philips Corporation)", "Megalogic (a trademark of Grundig Corporation)" or "SMARTLINK (a trademark of Sony Corporation)"

• Q-Link connection (p. 95)
• Use fully wired SCART cable.
- Set up the DVD Recorder / VCR. Read the manual of the recorder.
• Q-Link terminal setup in the Setup Menu [AV1 out] (p. 41)
- Download Analogue channel setting "Analogue channel download" (see below)

Features available

Analogue channel download

Analogue channel settings can be downloaded to a recorder with an analogue tuner (where Analogue is still broadcast). Digital channel settings are not downloaded.

- To download the Analogue channel settings [Q-Link Download] (p. 41) or [Auto Setup] in Analogue mode (p. 49) or "Auto Setup" - when first using the TV (p. 13)

Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record

Recording the current programme on a DVD Recorder / VCR immediately.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record - 1

text_image • Available conditions: Picture source Mode Recording from Analogue TV TV monitor out AV Recorder's tuner freesat, DVB, Other Sat. / Satellite TV TV monitor out AV (watching recorder's tuner) AV Recorder's tuner AV (watching recorder's external input) AV Recorder's external input AV (watching TV's external input) AV TV monitor out • When Direct TV Recording is performed, the recorder is automatically turned on if it is in Standby mode. • Changing channel or turning off the TV is available while the recorder is recording from its own tuner. • Changing channel is not available while the recorder is recording from the TV tuner.

■ To stop recording

Unlock the tuner

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording - 2

Tuner Locked

Press EXIT to unlock and stop recording

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording - 3

When the DVD Recorder / VCR starts playback or the direct navigator / function menu for the equipment is activated, the TV is turned on and the input mode is switched automatically so that you can view the content. (Only when the TV is in Standby mode.)

When the TV is set to Standby mode, the recorder is also automatically set to Standby. (Only when the videocassette or disc is not active.)

- This function will work even if the TV enters Standby mode automatically by auto power standby function.

Note

• Some recorders are not compatible. Read the manual of the recorder.

\*Enjoy additional HDMI Inter-Operability with Panasonic products which have "HDAVI Control" function.

This TV supports "HDAVI Control 5" function.

Connections to the equipment (DIGA Recorder, HD Video Camera, Player theatre, Amplifier, etc.) with HDMI and SCART cables allow you to interface them automatically (p. 95, 96).

These features are limited to models incorporating "HDAVI Control" and "VIERA Link".

  • Some functions are not available depending on the equipment's version of HDAVI Control. Please confirm the connected equipment's version of HDAVI Control.
  • VIERA Link "HDAVI Control", based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added.
    As such, its operation with other manufacturers' equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.
  • Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers' equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
  • For information about applicable Panasonic equipment, consult your local Panasonic dealer or refer to www.panasonic.co.uk

Preparations

  • Connect the equipment that supports VIERA Link.
    • VIERA Link connection (p. 95, 96)
    Use a fully wired HDMI compliant cable. Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
    Recommended Panasonic HDMI cables' part numbers:
    • RP-CDHS15 (1.5 m) • RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m) • RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m)
  • Use a fully wired SCART cable.
  • Set up the connected equipment. Read the manual of the equipment.
  • For optimal recording, the settings of the recorder may need to be changed. For details, read the manual of the recorder.
  • Download Analogue channel setting "Analogue channel download" (see below)
  • Set [VIERA Link] [On] in the Setup Menu - [VIERA Link] (p. 41)
  • Set up the TV
    After connection, turn the equipment on and then switch the TV on.
    Select the input mode to HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 or HDMI4 (p. 30), and make sure that an image is displayed correctly.
    This setup should be done each time when the following conditions occur:
    • for the first time
  • when adding or reconnecting equipment
  • when changing setup

Features available

Analogue channel download

Analogue channel settings can be downloaded to a recorder with an analogue tuner (where Analogue is still broadcast). Digital channel settings are not downloaded.

- To download the Analogue channel settings [Q-Link Download] (p. 41) or [Auto Setup] in Analogue mode (p. 49) or "Auto Setup" - when first using the TV (p. 13)

Easy playback

Automatic Input switching - When the connected equipment is operated (during playback or menu operations, etc.), the input mode is switched automatically. When playback is stopped or menus are exited, the input mode returns to the original setting.

When the connected equipment starts playback or the direct navigator / function menu for the equipment is activated, the TV is automatically turned on and the input mode is switched automatically so that you can view the content. (Only when the TV is in Standby mode.)

When the TV is set to Standby mode, the connected equipment is also automatically set to Standby.

- This function will work even if the TV enters Standby mode automatically by auto power standby function.

Reduce unnecessary power consumption in standby [Standby Power Save]

Set Standby Power Save [On] in the Setup Menu to use this function → [Standby Power Save] (p. 41)

The power consumption in Standby mode of the connected equipment is controlled in synchronization with the TV On / Off state.

When the TV is set to Standby mode, the connected equipment is automatically set to Standby and the power consumption in Standby mode of the connected equipment is automatically minimised.

When the TV is turned on and the connected equipment is still in Standby mode, the power consumption of the connected equipment is increased to reduce the startup time.

- This function is effective if the connected equipment can change the power consumption in Standby mode and is set to higher consumption.

Auto standby for unnecessary equipment [Intelligent Auto Standby]

Set Intelligent Auto Standby [On (With reminder)] or [On (No reminder)] in the Setup Menu to use this function → [Intelligent Auto Standby] (p. 41)

When the TV is On, non-watched or non-used connected equipment goes into Standby mode automatically to reduce power consumption. For example, when the input mode is switched from HDMI, the connected equipment will go into Standby mode / when Speaker Selection is changed to [TV], the Player theatre will go into Standby mode (except when watching a disc).

  • If you select [On (With reminder)], the on screen message will be displayed before the connected equipment turns to Standby.
  • This function may not work properly depending on the connected equipment. If required, set to [Off].

Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record [Direct TV Rec]

Recording the current programme on a DIGA Recorder immediately.

  • If you connect a variety of recorders including other manufacturers' recorders at the same time, please connect the DIGA Recorder to the TV's lower HDMI terminal number. For example, if you use HDMI1 and HDMI2 for two recorders, connect the DIGA Recorder to HDMI1.
  • If Direct TV Recording does not operate, check the settings and the equipment ➤ "Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features" (p. 95, 96), "Preparations" (p. 98)
  • If you wish to record a programme that the DIGA Recorder does not support, a SCART connection is required and the programme is recorded by Q-Link function (p. 97).
  • Depending on the programme, a SCART connection may be required to record.
  • Changing channel or turning off the TV is available while the recorder is recording from its own tuner.
  • Changing channel is not available while the recorder is recording from the TV tuner.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Direct TV Recording - What you see is What you record [Direct TV Rec] - 1

text_image DIRECT TV REC EXIT VIERATINK GUIDE OK

1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display [VIERA Link Menu] - 1

2

Select [Direct TV Rec] and start recording

VIERA Link Menu
Pause Live TVStart
Direct TV RecStart
VIERA Link ControlRecorder
Speaker SelectionHome Cinema

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Direct TV Rec] and start recording - 1
select
access / start

- You can also start recording directly.

DIRECT TV REC

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Direct TV Rec] and start recording - 2

■ To stop recording

Select [Stop] in [Direct TV Rec]

VIERA Link Menu
Pause Live TVStart
Direct TV RecStop
VIERA Link ControlRecorder
Speaker SelectionHome Cinema

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording - 1
select
access / stop

- You can also stop recording directly.

Unlock the tuner

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording - 3

Tuner Locked Press EXIT to unlock and stop recording

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To stop recording - 4

Pause Live TV programme [Pause Live TV]

You can pause the live TV programme and resume the programme later.

The live TV programme will be recorded on HDD of the connected DIGA Recorder.

• This function is available with a DIGA Recorder which has HDD.
- If you connect a variety of recorders including other manufacturers' recorders at the same time, please connect the DIGA Recorder which has HDD to the TV's lower HDMI terminal number. For example, if you use HDMI1 and HDMI2 for two recorders, connect the DIGA Recorder which has HDD to HDMI1.

- If Pause Live TV does not operate, check the settings and the equipment

"Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features" (p. 95, 96), "Preparations" (p. 98)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Pause Live TV programme [Pause Live TV] - 1

text_image INPUT TV VIERALER OK OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display [VIERA Link Menu] - 1

2 Select [Pause Live TV] and pause

The TV picture will be paused.

VIERA Link Menu
Pause Live TVStart
Direct TV RecStart
VIERA Link ControlRecorder
Speaker SelectionHome Cinema

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Pause Live TV] and pause - 1

• Live TV programme is recorded on HDD from where it was paused.

- If the paused TV picture disappears after a few minutes.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Pause Live TV] and pause - 2

(the paused picture will be restored)

- Follow the operation guide to operate Pause Live TV function.

■ To operate Pause Live TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To operate Pause Live TV - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["OK"] --> B["search backward"]
    A --> C["pause"]
    A --> D["search forward"]
    A --> E["playback"]
    A --> F["stop"]

• Operations may be different depending on the recorder. In this case, follow the operation guide or read the manual of the recorder.

- If you stop playback, the recorded programme will be deleted from HDD.

■ To return to Live TV (eop playback of Pause Live TV / cancel pause)

Select [Yes]
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To return to Live TV (eop playback of Pause Live TV / cancel pause) - 1

text_image Pause Live TV Stop Pause Live TV? Yes No

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ To return to Live TV (eop playback of Pause Live TV / cancel pause) - 2

- If you stop playback or cancel pause, the recorded programme will be deleted from HDD.

You can control some functions of the connected equipment with this TV remote control (point the remote control at the TV's signal receiver).

  • If you cannot operate the menu of the connected equipment, check the settings and the equipment
    → "Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features" (p. 95, 96), "Preparations" (p. 98)
  • For details of the operations for the connected equipment, read the manual of the equipment.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Control the menu of the connected equipment by VIERA remote control [VIERA Link Control] - 1

text_image VIERA Link OK

1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display [VIERA Link Menu] - 1

2

VIERA Link Menu
Pause Live TVStart
Direct TV RecStart
VIERA Link ControlRecorder
Speaker SelectionHome Cinema

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [VIERA Link Control] - 1

3

Select the equipment you want to access

The type of the connected equipment is displayed.

Select the type of the equipment and access.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select the equipment you want to access - 1

text_image VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Start Direct TV Rec Start VIERA Link Control Recorder Speaker Selection Home Cinema

[Recorder] / [Player] / [Home Cinema] / [Video Camera] / [LUMIX] / [Digital Camera] / [Other]

  • You can also access directly by using VIERA TOOLS "How to Use VIERA TOOLS" (p. 36)
  • The displayed item may vary depending on the connected equipment.
    • [Home Cinema] means Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or Recorder theatre.
    • [Other] means Tuner set top box.

The menu of the accessed equipment (Input mode will be changed automatically)

4

Operate the menu of the equipment

Available VIERA remote control buttons: (depending on the connected equipment)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Operate the menu of the equipment - 1

text_image ENT OK OFFS TITLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SEC PROGRAMM E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<< E<<

1 Set the position to "TV"

DVD/VCR, TV

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set the position to "TV" - 1

2 Follow the operation guide

• To display the operation guide

OPTION

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Follow the operation guide - 1

If other manufacturers' equipment is accessed, Setup / Contents Selection menu may be displayed.

- When the key words are displayed on colour bar

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Follow the operation guide - 2

(red)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Follow the operation guide - 3

en)

(ye

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Follow the operation guide - 4

(blue)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Follow the operation guide - 5

Note

- Some operations may not be available depending on the equipment. In this case use its own remote control to operate the equipment.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Note - 1

If multiple recorders or players are connected

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - If multiple recorders or players are connected - 1

text_image VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Direct TV Rec VIERA Link Control Speaker Selection Start Start Recorder2 Home Cinema

The number is given from the TV's lower HDMI terminal number connected to the same type equipment. For example, two recorders to HDMI2 and HDMI3, in this case the recorder connected to HDMI2 is displayed as [Recorder1], and the recorder connected to HDMI3 is displayed as [Recorder2].

[Recorder1-3 / Player1-3]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - If multiple recorders or players are connected - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - If you access non-VIERA Link equipment - 1

text_image VIERA Link Menu Pause Live TV Direct TV Rec VIERA Link Control Speaker Selection Start Start Recorder Home Cinema

The type of the connected equipment is displayed. You can access the menu of the equipment. But you cannot operate it. Use its own remote control to operate the equipment.

Speaker control [Speaker Selection]

You can control the home theatre speakers with this TV remote control (point the remote control at the TV's signal receiver).

- If you cannot operate, check the settings and the equipment

→ "Summary of Q-Link and VIERA Link features" (p. 95, 96), "Preparations" (p. 98)

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Speaker control [Speaker Selection] - 1

text_image VIERA-LINK OK Panasonic TV

1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Display [VIERA Link Menu] - 1

2

Select [Speaker Selection]

VIERA Link Menu
Pause Live TVStart
Direct TV RecStart
VIERA Link ControlRecorder
Speaker SelectionHome Cinema

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Select [Speaker Selection] - 1

3

Set to [Home Cinema] or [TV]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Set to [Home Cinema] or [TV] - 1

[HomeCinema]

The Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or Amplifier will be automatically turned on if it is in Standby mode and the sound will be output from theatre speakers connected to the equipment.

• Volume up / down

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [HomeCinema] - 1

• Mute

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - [HomeCinema] - 2

• The sound of the TV speakers is muted.
- When the equipment is turned off, the TV speakers will be activated.

[TV]

TV speakers are active.

Multi-channel sound

If you wish to enjoy multi-channel sound (e.g. Dolby Digital 5.1ch) via an Amplifier, connect the Amplifier to the TV with an HDMI cable and an Optical digital audio cable (p. 96), and then select "Home Cinema". If your Amplifier has "HDAVI Control 5" function, you only need to connect with an HDMI cable. In this case, connect your Amplifier to the TV's HDMI2 terminal.

To enjoy the sound from the DIGA Recorder in multi-channel sound, connect an HDMI cable from the DIGA Recorder to the Amplifier (p. 96).

Note

• These functions may not work properly depending on the connected equipment.
- Image or sound may not be available for the first few seconds when input mode is switched.
- Easy playback may be available by using the remote control for Player theatre, Blu-ray Disc theatre or Amplifier. Read the manual of the equipment.
- "HDAVI Control 5" is the newest standard (current as of December, 2010) for HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with conventional HDAVI equipment.
• To confirm this TV's version of HDAVI Control [System Information] (p. 43)

External Equipment

These diagrams show our recommendations for connection of your TV to various pieces of equipment.

For other connections, consult the instructions for each piece of equipment, the table (p. 105), and the specifications (p. 122, 123).

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - External Equipment - 1

flowchart
graph TD
    A["Satellite dish"] --> B["Satellite cable"]
    B --> C["Cable TV box"]
    C --> D["Cable"]
    D --> E["Fully wired HDMI compliant cable"]
    E --> F["To record / playback"]
    F --> G["RF cable"]
    G --> H["Fully wired SCART cable"]
    H --> I["DVD Recorder / VCR"]
    I --> J["To watch DVDs"]
    J --> K["COMPONENT adaptor (supplied)"]
    K --> L["(Viewing)"]
    L --> M["DVD Player"]
    K --> N["(Listening)"]
    N --> O["Audio adaptor (supplied)"]
    O --> P["HDMI equipment"]
    P --> Q["Recorder / Player"]
    Q --> R["Fullly wired HDMI compliant cable"]
    R --> S["HDMI connection (p. 110)"]
    S --> T["Camcorder"]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - External Equipment - 2

flowchart
graph TD
    A["External Equipment"] --> B["Network (wired)"]
    B --> C["Ferrite core - Large size (supplied)"]
    C --> D["Less than 10 cm"]
    C --> E["Less than 10 cm"]
    D --> F["LAN cable"]
    E --> G["Hub or Router"]
    F --> H["Internet"]
    G --> I["Modem"]
    H --> J["USB HDD"]
    I --> K["USB devices"]
    K --> L["Wireless LAN Adaptor"]
    L --> M["USB 3 (HDD)"]
    M --> N["USB cable"]
    N --> O["USB HDD"]
    P["External Equipment"] --> Q["To listen with speakers"]
    Q --> R["Optical digital audio cable or RCA cable"]
    R --> S["Audio adaptor (supplied)"]
    S --> T["Composite adaptor (supplied)"]
    T --> U["(Viewing)"]
    T --> V["(Listening)"]
    U --> W["Amplifier with speaker system"]
    V --> X["Camcorder / Game equipment"]
    W --> Y["To enjoy the sound from the external equipment in multi-channel sound (e.g. Dolby Digital 5.1ch), connect the equipment to the amplifier. For the connections, read the manuals of the equipment and amplifier."]

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - External Equipment - 3

text_image Headphones Less than 10 cm (M3 stereo mini plug) Ferrite core - Small size (supplied) Rear of the TV Installing the Ferrite core ① ② Open Pull back the tab Wind the cable twice Press the cable through and close To adjust volume → [Headphone Volume] (p. 40)

Types of connectable equipment to each terminal

Recording / Playback (equipment)Terminal
AV1*4AV2*4COMPONENT*4AUDIO OUT*4DIGITAL AUDIO OUT*4ETHERNETHDMI 1-4USB 1-3
To record / playback videocassettes / DVDs (VCR / DVD Recorder)
To watch 3D contents (Blu-ray Disc Player)
To watch cable broadcasts (Cable TV box)○*1
To watch DVDs (DVD Player)
To watch camcorder images (Video camera)
To play games (Game equipment)
To use amplifier with speaker system○*2
To use network services
USB HDD Recording○*3
Q-Link
VIERA Link○(with HDMI)
Direct TV Recording

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - External Equipment - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - External Equipment - 5

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - External Equipment - 6
○: Recommended Connection
*1 : Use HDMI1 for automatic input switching.
*2 : Use HDMI2 for connecting an amplifier. This connection is applicable when using an amplifier that has ARC (Audio Return Channel) function.
*3 : Use USB 3 port for connecting the USB HDD.
*4: To connect the equipment, the terminal adaptor (supplied) is necessary.

Technical Information

Auto Aspect

The optimum size and aspect can be chosen automatically, and you can enjoy finer images.→ (p. 21)

Aspect Control Signal

[WIDE] will appear in the top left of the screen if a Widescreen signal (WSS) or a Control signal through SCART / HDMI terminal is found.

The aspect will switch to the appropriate 16:9 or 14:9 widescreen ratio.

This function will work in any aspect mode.

Input terminal Input signal formatAspect Control Signal
Widescreen signal (WSS)Control signal through SCART (pin8) / HDMI terminal
RFDVB
PAL I
PAL 525/60 6.0 MHz –
M.NTSC 6.0 MHz –
Satellite freesat, Other Sat. / Satellite
AV1 / AV2 (Composite)PAL
PAL 525/60 –
M.NTSC –
NTSC –
COMPONENT525 (480) / 60i, 60p –
625 (576) / 50i, 50p
750 (720) / 60p, 50p –
1,125 (1,080) / 60i, 50i –
HDMI1HDMI2HDMI3HDMI4525 (480) / 60i, 60p –
625 (576) / 50i, 50p –
750 (720) / 60p, 50p –
1,125 (1,080) / 60i, 50i –
1,125 (1,080) / 60p, 50p, 24p –

Auto mode

Auto mode determines the best aspect ratio to fill the screen. It does this using a four step process (WSS, Control signal through SCART / HDMI terminal, Letterbox detection or Justify to fill the screen).

This process may take several minutes, depending on the darkness of the image.

Letterbox detection:

If black bands at the top and bottom of the screen are detected, Auto mode chooses the best ratio and expands the image to fill the screen.

If no aspect signals are detected, Auto mode enhances the image for optimum viewing pleasure.

Note

  • The ratio varies depending on the programme, etc. If the ratio is out of the standard 16:9, black bands at the top and bottom of the screen may appear.
  • If the screen size looks unusual when a widescreen-recorded programme is played back on a VCR, adjust the tracking of the VCR. Read the manual of the VCR.

Supported file format in Media Player and media servers

Photo

Format FileextensionImage resolution (pixel)Details / Restrictions
JPEG.jpg.mpo8 × 8to30,719 × 17,279DCF*1 and EXIF*2 standardsSub-sampling : 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0Progressive JPEG is not supported.

*1 : Design rule for Camera File system - unified standard established by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)
*2 : Exchangeable Image File - image file format used by digital cameras

Video

Container File extension Video codec Audio codec Details / Restrictions
SD-Video .modMPEG1MPEG2MPEGDolby DigitalSD-Video Standard Ver. 1.3(Entertainment Video Profile)The data may not be available if a folder structure on the device is modified.
AVCHD .mts H.264 Dolby DigitalAVCHD Standard(including 3D videos recorded by the 3D-compatible Video Camera)The data may not be available if a folder structure on the device is modified.
AVI.avi.divxDIV3 DIV4DIVX DX50DIV6 XviDMPEG4 SP / ASPMPEGMP3Dolby DigitalCertified to play DivX Plus HD video file in Media PlayerFor details of DivX ➔ “DivX” (p. 108)
MKV.mkv H.264 BP / MP/ HPMPEGMP3Dolby DigitalDTS core
ASF.asf.wmvWindows MediaVideo Ver. 9VC-1WMACopy-protected files cannot be played back.WMA Pro and WMA Lossless are not supported.
MP4.mp4H.264 BP / MP / HPAACMP3Dolby DigitalThis TV supports this container recorded by Panasonic products.For details, read the manual of the products.
MOV.movMotionJPEGH.264 BP / MP / HPLinear PCM (RAW / TWOS / SOWT)AACMP3Dolby DigitalThis TV supports Motion JPEG recorded by Panasonic LUMIX Camera*3.This TV is not available for playing back Motion JPEG with the media server.
PS.mpg.mpegMPEG1MPEG2MPEGMP3Linear PCM-
TS.ts.tpMPEG2H.264AACMP3Dolby DigitalDolby Digital Plus HE-AACThis container can be played back only with the media server.

*3 : Some products of before the year 2004 may not be available. The compatibility with future products is not guaranteed.

Music

Codec File extension Restrictions
MP3 .mp3 -
AAC .m4a
WMA .wma

Note

  • Some files may not be played back even if they fulfill these conditions.
  • Do not use two-byte characters or other special codes for data.
  • The device may become unusable with this TV if the file or folder names are changed.

DivX

DivX Certified ^® to play DivX ^® and DivX Plus ^™ HD (H.264/MKV) video up to 1080p HD including premium content. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO :

DivX ^ is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified ^ device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.

Subtitle text file of DivX

Subtitles format - MicroDVD, SubRip, TMPlayer

●The DivX video file and subtitles text file are inside the same folder, and the file names are the same except for the file extensions.
- If there are more than one subtitles text files inside the same folder, they are displayed in the following order of priority: ".srt", ".sub", ".txt".
To confirm or change the current subtitle status while playing DivX content, press the OPTION button to display Option Menu.
- Depending on the methods used to create the file or the state of recording, only parts of the subtitles may be displayed, or the subtitles may not be displayed at all.

Note

  • Depending on how you make SD Card, USB Flash Memory or the media server, files and folders may not be displayed in the order you numbered.
  • Depending on how you create the files and the structure of folders, the files and folders may not be displayed.
  • When there are many files and folders, operation may take time to complete or some files may not be displayed or playable.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND :

This DivX Certified ^® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the Setup Menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration.

To show DivX VOD registration code

→ [DivX® VOD] in the Setup Menu (p. 43)

  • If you want to generate the new registration code, you have to deregister the present registration code.
    After playing DivX VOD content once, the confirmation screen to deregister will be displayed in [DivX®VOD] in the Setup Menu. If you press the OK button on the confirmation screen, the deregistration code will be generated and you will not be able to play any contents that you purchased using the present registration code.
    You will obtain the new registration code by pressing the OK button on the deregistration code screen.
  • If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code different from this TV's code, you will not be able to play this content. ([Your device is not authorized to play this DivX protected video.] is displayed.)

Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of times

Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.

When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of remaining plays is zero. ([This DivX rental has expired.] is displayed.)

- When playing this content, the number of remaining plays is reduced by one in the following conditions:

  • If you exit the current application.
    • If you play the other content.
  • If you go to the next or previous content.

Devices for recording or playing back

■ SD Card (for playing back in Media Player)

Card format: SDXC Card - exFAT SDHC Card / SD Card - FAT16 or FAT32

Compliant card type (maximum capacity): SDXC Card (64 GB), SDHC Card (32 GB), SD Card (2 GB), miniSD Card (2 GB) (requiring miniSD adaptor)

  • If miniSD Card is used, insert / remove it together with the adaptor.
  • Check the latest information on the card type at the following website. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/
  • Use an SD Card which meets SD standards. If not, it may cause the TV to malfunction.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - ■ SD Card (for playing back in Media Player) - 1

text_image 2.1 mm 32 mm 24 mm

■ USB Flash Memory (for playing back in Media Player)

USB Flash Memory format : FAT16, FAT32 or exFAT

- A USB HDD formatted by PC is not supported in Media Player.

■ USB HDD (for recording the digital TV programmes with this TV and playing back in Media Player)

The capacity of USB HDD that have been tested for the performance with this TV : From 160 GB to 3 TB

  • Connect the USB HDD to the socket outlet to record and play back properly with this TV.
  • Format the USB HDD with this TV in order to use it. (p. 68)
  • Regarding the performance, not all USB HDDs are guaranteed. Check the USB HDDs that have been tested for the performance with this TV at the following website. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/

Note

• Data modified with a PC may not be displayed.
- Do not remove the device while the TV is accessing data (this can damage device or TV).
- Do not touch the pins on the device.
- Do not subject the device to a high pressure or impact.
- Insert the device in the correct direction (otherwise, device or TV may be damaged).
- Electrical interference, static electricity, or erroneous operation may damage the data or device.
- Back up the recorded data at regular intervals in case of deteriorated or damaged data or erratic operation of the TV. (Panasonic is not liable for any deterioration or damage of recorded data.)

SCART and HDMI terminal information

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - AV1 SCART terminal (RGB, VIDEO, Q-Link) - 1

text_image Socket Earth 21 CVBS out (video) 19 CVBS earth 17 Red in 15 Red earth 13 Green in 11 Green earth 9 Blue in 7 Blue earth 5 Audio out (L) 3 Audio out (R) 1 20 CVBS in (video) 18 RGB status earth 16 Status RGB 14 Earth 12 -- 10 Q-Link data 8 Status CVBS 6 Audio in (L) 4 Audio earth 2 Audio in (R)

HDMI terminal

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - HDMI terminal - 1

text_image Hot Plug Detect 19 DDC/CEC Ground 17 SCL 15 CEC 13 TMDS Clock Shield 11 TMDS Data0- 9 TMDS Data0+ 7 TMDS Data1 Shield 5 TMDS Data2- 3 TMDS Data2+ 1 18 +5V Power 16 SDA 14 Utility 12 TMDS Clock- 10 TMDS Clock+ 8 TMDS Data0 Shield 6 TMDS Data1- 4 TMDS Data1+ 2 TMDS Data2 Shield

Characters table for numeric buttons

You can enter characters by using numeric buttons for free input items.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Characters table for numeric buttons - 1

text_image User input Name I A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T 7 $9 ! : # a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u y w x y z () + - . * ↓ 1 2 3 1 # abc 3 4 5 6 gm min 7 8 9 PEN time max

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Characters table for numeric buttons - 2

Press the numeric button repeatedly until you reach the desired character.

  • The character is set automatically if you do not press the button for 1 second.
  • You can also set the character by pressing the OK button or other numeric buttons within 1 second.

Characters table:

Numeric buttonsThe number of times to press
1234567891011
1.1!:#+-*-(
2abcabc2ABC
3cddef3DEF
4chighi4GHI
5jkjkl5JKL
6rromno6MNO
7perpqrs7PQRS
8tuytuv8TUV
9w/owxyz9WXYZ
0Space0

HDMI connection

HDMI (high-definition multimedia interface) is the world's first complete digital consumer AV interface complying with a non-compression standard.

HDMI allows you to enjoy high-definition digital images and high-quality sound by connecting the TV and the equipment.

HDMI-compatible equipment ^*1 with an HDMI or DVI output terminal, such as a DVD player, a cable TV Box or a game equipment, can be connected to the HDMI terminal using an HDMI compliant (fully wired) cable.

For information about connections, see "External Equipment" (p. 103).

Applicable HDMI features

- Input audio signal :

2ch Linear PCM (sampling frequencies - 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz)

- Input video signal :

480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720p, 1080i and 1080p

→ "Input signal that can be displayed" (p. 112)

Match the output setting of the digital equipment.

- Input PC signal :

→ "Input signal that can be displayed" (p. 112)

Match the output setting of the PC.

• VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 5)

→ [VIERA Link] (p. 98)

3D

- Content Type

- Deep Colour

• x.v.Colour™

• Audio Return Channel ^*2

(HDMI2 terminal only)

DVI connection

If the external equipment has only a DVI output, connect to the HDMI terminal via a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable ^*3 . When the DVI to HDMI adaptor cable is used, connect the audio cable to AUDIO IN terminals.

Note

●Audio settings can be made on the [HDMI1 / 2 / 3 / 4 Input] in the Sound Menu. (p. 40)
- If the connected equipment has an aspect adjustment function, set the aspect ratio to [16:9].
• These HDMI connectors are "type A".
●These HDMI connectors are compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection.
● Equipment having no digital output terminal may be connected to the input terminal of "COMPONENT" or "VIDEO" to receive analogue signals.
- This TV incorporates HDMI™ technology.

*1 : The HDMI logo is displayed on HDMI-compliant equipment.
*2 : Audio Return Channel (ARC) is a function to be able to send digital sound signals via an HDMI cable.
*3 : Enquire at your local digital equipment retailer shop.

USB connection

  • It is recommended to connect the USB HDD or USB Flash Memory directly to the TV's USB ports.
  • Some USB devices or USB HUB may not be used with this TV.
  • You cannot connect any devices by using USB card reader.
  • You cannot use two or more same kind of USB devices simultaneously except USB Flash Memory or USB HDD.
    • Additional information for USB devices may be on the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/

USB Keyboard

  • The USB Keyboard which requires the driver is not supported.
    • To change the language type [USB Keyboard Layout] (p. 43)
  • Characters may not be displayed correctly on the TV screen depending on the connected keyboard or the keyboard layout setting.
  • Some of the keys of USB keyboards may correspond to the operation of the remote control.
USB Keyboard Remote Control USB Keyboard Remote Control
↑/↓/←/→Cursor buttons F2 VIERA TOOLS
Enter OK F3 MENU
Backspace BACK/RETURN F4 INPUT (AV)
Esc EXIT F5 / F6 Channel Down / Up
0 - 9 / Character Numeric buttonsF7 / F8 Volume Down / Up
F1 GUIDEF9 / F10 / F11 / F12Coloured buttons

Gamepad

  • Check the gamepads that have been tested for the performance with this TV at the following website. http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/tv/
  • Some of the keys of gamepads correspond to the operation of the remote control.

Example :
PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Gamepad - 1

text_image 1 2 Select Start 3 4 5 11 10 9 8 7 6
Remote ControlRemote Control
1Volume Up / Down7VIERA TOOLS
2Channel Up / Down8EXIT
3GUIDE9INPUT (AV)
4OK
5BACK/RETURN10MENU
6VIERA Connect11Cursor buttons

Input signal that can be displayed

COMPONENT (Y, P_B , P_R ), HDMI

SignalnameCOMPONENTHDMI
525 (480) / 60i, 60p
625 (576) / 50i, 50p
750 (720) / 60p, 50p
1,125 (1,080) / 60i, 50i
1,125 (1,080) / 60p, 50p, 24p

○ Mark : Applicable input signal

PC (from HDMI terminal)

Signal name Horizontal frequency (kHz) Vertical frequency (Hz)
640 × 480 @60 Hz 31.47 60.00
750 (720) / 60p 45.00 60.00
1,125 (1,080) / 60p 67.50 60.00

Applicable input signal for PC is basically compatible to HDMI standard timing.

Note

  • Signals other than above may not be displayed properly.
    • The above signals are reformatted for optimal viewing on your display.
  • PC signal is magnified or compressed for display, so that it may not be possible to show fine detail with sufficient clarity.

How to use Windows 7 as a media server

Follow the examples below to set up Windows 7 for use as a media server. Confirm the MAC Address of VIERA in [Network Setup] (p. 90).

The following procedure and screens are examples. For more information, refer to the help functions of Windows 7.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to use Windows 7 as a media server - 1

text_image Control Panel Adjust your computer's settings File Up - Short Items ? Action Center Adventure Tools Accounting Color Management Windows Edit Active Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System Edit System

① Open the Windows start menu and select [Control Panel]. Select [HomeGroup] in Control Panel window.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to use Windows 7 as a media server - 2

text_image Change homogroup settings This computer belongs to a homogroup Show Home Group and Printers Pictures Documents Music Photos Value How did this share additional files? How did it include files and files? Choose my format, music, and video to all devices on my home network. Choose media creating options... Other homogroup options: View or print the homogroup password Change the password... Save the homogroup... Change advanced sharing settings... Start the HomeGroup track/mathode Save changes Cancel

② Be sure [Pictures], [Music] and [Videos] of "Share libraries and printers" and [Stream my pictures, music, and videos to all devices on my home network] of "Share media with devices" are checked. (Check them and click [Save changes] if necessary). Then select [Choose media streaming options...].

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to use Windows 7 as a media server - 3

text_image Choose media streaming options for computers and devices Name your media library Choose default settings... Share devices: < All networks >... Study types: PC or PC and software alternatives. All device types: Windows Options: Do not use any access to media streaming when your PC is stored. All devices and all users need to access your shared media. Choose from any and following options: Choose parents' options: Tell us from all the media streaming Read for grouping appropriate options. UHUA Technologies Network History USE Details Database: Unavailable Handwritten notes for available Reset: Unavailable Read out available available Model version: Unavailable Service description: Read out available available In situating features: User address: 123457.0678 If address: 123457.0678 OK Cancel Property window

③ In [Name your media library:] text box, enter a name that will identify your PC on VIERA.

On the Show devices drop bar, select [All networks] to display all the available devices in the list. VIERA Name stored in the [Network Link Settings] (p. 86) will be displayed.

Select the VIERA Name and click [Allowed] so that VIERA can access your PC.

Then, click [OK].

If the VIERA Name is not displayed correctly, click the device to confirm the MAC address of the device in property window. Find a device that has the same MAC address as VIERA: that is your VIERA.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - How to use Windows 7 as a media server - 4

text_image Computer - Local Disk (LC) - Uvery - Public Organize - Including Store - Show ad - Run - New store Favorites Desktops Downloads Record Rtnes Licenses Documents Music Pictures Music Computer Network Name Public Documents Public Music Public Movies Public TV Public Volumes Data extracted Target Size 24/01/2008 06:33 File holder 24/01/2008 06:43 File holder 24/01/2008 06:43 File holder 24/01/2008 06:43 File holder 24/01/2008 06:43 File holder 24/01/2008 06:43 File holder 24/01/2008 06:53 File holder

④ To share photos, music and videos with VIERA, put photo files into [Public Pictures] folder and video files into [Public Videos] folder under \Computer\Local Disk (C:\Users\Public.

FAQs

Before requesting service or assistance, please follow these simple guides to resolve the problem.

If the problem still persists, please contact your local Panasonic dealer or Panasonic Customer Care Centre for assistance. For details (p. 124)

Block noise, frozen or disappearing image occurs in digital mode / White spots or shadow image (ghosting) occurs in Analogue mode / Some channels cannot be tuned

  • Check the position, direction and connection of the aerial.
  • Check [Signal Condition] (p. 51, 53). If [Signal Quality] is displayed in red, the digital signal is weak.
  • Check your postcode area is able to receive the Freeview channels at www.freeview.co.uk
  • Digital signals may be relatively low to prevent interference with analogue signals for the period of Digital Switchover. Check the schedule of Digital Switchover at www.digitaluk.co.uk
  • Weather conditions will affect signal reception (heavy rain, snow, etc.), in particular in poor reception areas. Even during good weather, high pressure can cause poor reception of some channels.
    Due to the digital reception technologies involved, quality of the digital signals may be relatively low in some cases, despite good reception of analogue channels.
  • Turn the TV off with the Mains power On / Off switch, and then on again.
  • If problem persists, consult your local dealer.

freesat Auto Setup cannot be done completely

- Check connections and dish alignment. The dish needs to be pointing at Astra 2 at 28.2^ East, and Eurobird 1 at 28.5^ East.

- If the problem persists, consult your freesat registered retailer or call Freesat (UK) Ltd on 08450 990 990 or visit www.freesat.co.uk

Neither image nor sound is produced

• Is the TV in AV mode?
- Check the correct AV input mode is selected.
- Check the mains lead is plugged into the socket outlet.
• Has the TV been turned On?
- Check the Picture Menu (p.38, 39) and volume.
- Check all required cables and connections are firmly in place.

Auto aspect

  • Auto aspect is designed to provide you with the best ratio to fill the screen. (p. 106)
  • Press the ASPECT button if you would like to change the aspect ratio manually (p. 21)

Black and white picture

- When connecting with SCART, ensure the output setting of the external equipment is not S-Video.

Input mode, i.e. EC/AV1 remains on the screen

- Press the i button to clear this message. Press again to redisplay.

- Confirm SCART cable and connection. Also set [AV1 out] in the Setup Menu (p. 41)

  • Confirm the connection. (p. 95, 96)
  • Turn the connected equipment on and then switch the TV on. (p. 98)

Recording does not start immediately

- Check the settings of the recorder. For details, read the manual of the recorder.

Contrast is reduced

- Contrast is lowered in the following conditions without any user operation for a few minutes:

  • no signal in DVB or AV mode
  • selection of a locked channel
  • selection of an invalid channel
    • selection of a radio channel
  • displayed menu
    • digital teletext (no video contents)
  • thumbnail or still picture in Media Player or DLNA operations
Problem Actions
ScreenChaotic image, noisy● Set [P-NR] in the Picture Menu (to remove noise). ●(p. 38)● Check nearby electrical products (fluorescent lamp, DECT phones, mobile phones, microwave, etc.).
No image can be displayed● Is [Contrast], [Brightness] or [Colour] in the Picture Menu set to the minimum? ➔ (p. 38)● Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced” ➔ (p. 114)
Blurry or distorted image (no sound or low volume)● Reset channels. ●(p. 48, 49)● Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced” ➔ (p. 114)
Unusual image is displayed● Turn the TV Off with Mains power On / Off switch, then turn it On again.● If the problem persists, initialise all settings ▪[Shipping Condition] (p. 62)
SoundNo sound is produced● Is Sound Mute active? ●(p. 9)● Is the volume set to the minimum?● Is Speaker Selection (VIERA Link) set to [TV]?● Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced” ➔ (p. 114)
Sound level is low or sound is distorted● Sound signal reception may be deteriorated.● Set [NICAM] (p. 40) in the Sound Menu to [Off]. (Analogue only)● Please also refer to “Neither image nor sound is produced” ➔ (p. 114)
Unusual sound from the TV● When power is on, whirring sound of cooling fan or drive noise may be heard from inside the TV (not a sign of faulty operation).
3DCannot see 3D images● Has the 3D Eyewear been switched On?● Ensure that [3D Mode Selection] is set to [3D]. ➔(p. 34)● Some 3D image signals may not be automatically recognised as 3D images. Set [3D Mode Selection (Manual)] to match the picture format. ➔(p. 34)● Check that there are no obstacles between the infrared sensors on the TV and the 3D Eyewear. If the 3D Eyewear stops receiving the infrared signal for about 5 minutes, the 3D Eyewear will be turned off automatically.● Check the available area to use the 3D Eyewear ➔(p. 33)● Depending on the person, the 3D images may be difficult to see, or cannot be seen, especially in users that have a different level of eyesight between the left and right eyes. Take the necessary steps (wearing glasses etc.) to correct your eyesight before use.
3D Eyewear is turned off automatically● Check that there are no obstacles between the infrared sensors on the TV and the 3D Eyewear or that the 3D Eyewear is placed inside the coverage area (p. 33). If the 3D Eyewear stops receiving the infrared signal for about 5 minutes, the 3D Eyewear will be turned off automatically.
There is something wrong with the 3D images● Check the setting of [Picture Sequence] or [Edge Smoother]. ➔(p. 33)
The indicator lamp does not light when pressing the power button on the 3D Eyewear● The battery may be running low or flat. Replace it.
Digital ChannelNo programmes shown on TV Guide● Reset channels. ➔(p. 48, 49)● Check the digital transmission by contacting Digital UK on 08456 50 50 50 or at www.digitaluk.co.uk● Check the analogue broadcast (if still available in your area).● Consult an aerial engineer to check the alignment of your aerial.
Cannot find a channel you have previously watched● The channel may broadcast for part of the day.● Check the channel in the TV Guide. ➔(p. 22)● Channel position numbers may be changed by broadcasters.● Reset channels. ➔(p. 48, 49)
HDMISound is unusual● Set the sound setting of the connected equipment to “2ch L.PCM”.● Check the [HDMI1 / 2 / 3 / 4 Input] setting in the Sound Menu. ➔(p. 40)● If digital sound connection has a problem, select analogue sound connection. ➔(p. 110)
Pictures from external equipment are unusual when the equipment is connected via HDMI● Check the HDMI cable is connected properly. ➔(p. 103)● Turn the TV and equipment Off, then turn them On again.● Check an input signal from the equipment. ➔(p. 112)● Check the output resolution of the equipment.● Use equipment compliant with EIA/CEA-861/861D.
NetworkCannot connect to the networkCheck the LAN cable is connected properly. (p. 85)Check the connections and settings. (p. 85 - 90)Check the network equipment and network environment.The router may not be set to issue IP address automatically. If the network administrator prefers to allocate an IP address, set an IP address manually. (p. 87)The router may be using MAC address filtering (security setting). Confirm the MAC Address of this TV (p. 90) and set the router to be able to use it.If the problem persists, consult your Internet Service Provider or telecommunications company.
Cannot select the file during DLNA operationsIs media server of the connected equipment prepared? (p. 84)Check applicable data format. (p. 107, 108)
Cannot operate VIERA ConnectCheck the connections and settings. (p. 85 - 90)The server or connected line might be busy now.
OtherThe TV does not switch OnPress and hold the standby On / Off switch on the remote control for about 1 second if Power LED is red.Check the mains lead is plugged into the socket.The fuse in the mains plug may have blown. Replace it with one of an identical rating (p. 4)
The TV goes into Standby modeAuto power standby function is activated. (p. 10)The TV enters Standby mode about 30 minutes after analogue broadcast ends.
The remote control does not work or is intermittentAre the batteries installed correctly? (p. 7)Has the TV been switched On?The batteries may be running low. Replace them.Point the remote control directly at the front of the TV (within about 7 m and a 30 degree angle of the front of the TV).Situate the TV so that sunshine or other sources of bright light do not shine on the TV's remote control signal receiver.
Parts of the TV become hotTemperature rises of parts of the front, top and rear panels will not pose any problems in terms of performance or quality of the TV.
Overcurrent error message appearsThe connected USB device might cause this error. Remove the device and turn the TV Off with Mains power On / Off switch, then turn it On again.Check if foreign objects are inside the USB port.
An error message appearsFollow the message's instructions.If the problem persists, contact your local Panasonic dealer or the authorized Service Centre.

On screen messages

Message Meaning / Action
All contents will be lost.Are you sure to delete this device?● Once you format the USB HDD, all the recorded programme will be erased.
All tuning data will be erased● [Shipping Condition] will erase all tuning data (p. 62)
Are you sure ?● Confirm correct operation.
Are you sure you want to delete this timer ?Press OK to delete timer.Press RETURN to return.● Confirm correct operation.
Bad signal● The signal is weak. Check the aerial is plugged in properly. It may be necessary to have an aerial / dish installer check the signal and aerial / dish alignment.● Reset channels. (p. 48, 49)
Child Lock is active!Press OK to enter PIN.● The selected channel is locked in Child Lock (p. 60). You must enter the PIN number before the channel will be displayed.
External (USB-HDD) Recording Due to StartThis message will appear 2 minutes before timer programming event for external (USB HDD) recording due to start.
Faulty dishThe satellite cable might be short-circuited or there might be connection problems of the cable. Check the cable and connection and then turn the TV Off with the Mains power On / Off switch, and turn it On again.If the message still persists, it may be necessary to consult a dish installer for checking the dish and cable.
Feature not available.It is not possible to record from COMPONENT or HDMI. Connect the recorder to the TV using a fully wired SCART cable for recording from the TV tuner.Confirm Q-Link or VIERA Link settings (p. 95 - 98)
Feature not available.Press OK to view how it works.The selected feature on VIERA TOOLS is not available. Press the OK button to view the demonstration to explain how to use it.
Found new software version ***.Press OK to start update (may take over 40 mins) or press EXIT to ignore and you can update when TV is in standbyThere is a new software available.
Invalid operation - Please check settings and connections.Check the Q-Link or VIERA Link connection and setting (p. 95 - 98)
Invalid system time. Please exit !Cannot get the time information and cannot edit Timer Programming screen.Check the connection of the RF cable.
Invalid system time, Timer Programming will not work.Please press TV button on remote control and check time display on BannerCannot get the time information. If there is no time displayed on the Information banner, check the connection of the RF cable.
Max. number of timers already set !The maximum number of timer programming events is 15.
New channels found!Press OK to update channel list.Press EXIT to ignore.There may be new channels available.This message will appear each time a change is made by the broadcasters. This message can be deactivated by setting [New Channel Message] to Off in [DVB Tuning Menu].Selecting OK will perform [Update Channel List].
No channel found.Please check aerial or local signal availability.Press OK to start Auto Setup.Follow the on screen instructions.Please also refer to p. 114.If channels are still not found, consult your local Panasonic dealer.
No module insertedCheck the CI module is inserted completely (p. 64).
No recording - Already recordingThe equipment may already be recording.
No recording - Check mediaThe tape or disc may be “write protected”, full, missing or damaged.
No recording - PlayingThe equipment may be playing the tape or disc.
No recording - Unknown reasonThe recording may not be performed. Check the equipment.
No serviceThe broadcaster has stopped the service. Check the channel in the TV Guide. (p. 22)
No signalThe TV cannot detect the signal. Check the connection of the RF cable.
Overcurrent error on USB device occurred.Please remove the USB device, and switch off the TV by mains power switch.The connected USB device might cause overcurrent error. Follow the on screen instructions.Check if foreign objects are inside the USB port.
PIN incorrect!The PIN number you entered is wrong.
Please check settings and connections on HDMI devices.Communication error in VIERA Link function (p. 98).
Please enter a frequency between 10700 and 12750 MHz.The frequency you entered is out of range. Consult the received satellite broadcasting company. (p. 56)
Please check settings and connections on HDMI devices.Communication error in VIERA Link function (p. 98).
Please wait.A function is in progress.
Recording this channel nowThe recorder is recording the programme from its own tuner. You can turn the TV off and leave the equipment recording in the normal way.
Reset to Factory Shipping Condition Completed.Please switch off TV.• [Auto Setup] will automatically start when Mains power On / Off switch is next turned On. (p. 13)
Sending Preset Data• Q-Link or VIERA Link channel download is in progress.
Software successfully updated.Press EXIT to continue.• The software updating is finished.
Software update failed. Please try again later.Press EXIT to continue.• Perform [System Update Search Now] in System Update (p. 65).If this is still unsuccessful, there may not be any new software available.
The device is not directly connected to the TV.The device may not work correctly.• Please do not connect the device via a USB HUB.
This timer will not follow the TV Guide information.Press OK to continue, RETURN to restore original timer.UK only• If you edit the start time or end time of Guide link programming by more than 10 minutes, it will no longer be performed as Guide link programming. The programming will be performed according to the time setting.
Timer already expired !• The starting time in Timer Programming has already passed. Set the timer correctly (p. 59).
Timer incorrect !• Set the start and end times in Timer Programming correctly (p. 59).
Timer overlap.Press OK to keep, RETURN to edit.• Timer programming events are overlapped. Press the OK button to keep the overlapped setting. [Ext Rec.] and [USB HDD Rec.] are given priority over [Reminder]. When two or more [Ext Rec.] / [USB HDD Rec.] overlap, the first timer programming event starts and finishes as programmed. The next timer programming event can then start.
Tuner LockedPress EXIT to unlock and stop recording• If you want to unlock the tuner, cancel Direct TV Recording (p. 97, 99), the recording of Timer Programming (p. 59) or One Touch Recording (p. 70).
Unable to download, please check equipment• The tape or disc is active. Stop the equipment and try again.
3D image not available.• You may use a function not available for 3D effect. Exit the function to view the 3D images.

Media Player

Message Meaning / Action
Cannot read fileThe file is broken or unreadable.Check applicable data format. (p. 107, 108)
No Device InsertedConfirm the SD Card or USB device is inserted correctly.
No valid file to playThe card has no data.
This operation is not possibleThe selected operation is not available.

Network

Message Meaning / Action
An internal error occurred.Check the settings. (p. 86 - 90)
Cannot read fileThe file is broken or unreadable.Check applicable data format. (p. 107, 108)
Communication with the server failed.This might be a problem of the media server.Read the manual of the server software.
Connection to the server failed.Check the connections and settings. (p. 85 - 90)
Server not foundThere are no available media server on your home network.Check the connections and settings. (p. 85 - 90)
The software update is not completed.Network download failed.Check the connections and settings. (p. 85 - 90)
Ethernet cable not connectedCheck the connection of the LAN cable. If you use a hub, also check the light on the hub is lit.The LAN cable might be defective.

Maintenance

First, remove the mains plug from the socket outlet.

Display panel, Cabinet, Pedestal

Regular care:

Gently wipe the surface of the display panel, cabinet, or pedestal by using a soft cloth to clean the dirt or fingerprints.

For stubborn dirt:

Dampen a soft cloth with clean water or diluted neutral detergent (1 part detergent to 100 parts water). Then wring the cloth and wipe the surface. Finally, wipe away all the moisture.

Caution

  • Do not use a hard cloth or rub the surface too hard. This may cause scratches on the surface.
    Take care not to subject the TV's surfaces to water or detergent more than requires. A liquid inside the TV could lead to product failure.
    Take care not to subject the surfaces to insect repellent, solvent, thinner or other volatile substances. This may degrade surface quality or cause peeling of the paint.
  • The surface of the display panel is specially treated and may be easily damaged. Take care not to tap or scratch the surface with your fingernail or other hard objects.
  • Do not allow the cabinet or pedestal to make contact with a rubber or PVC substance for a long time. This may degrade surface quality.

Mains plug

Wipe the mains plug with a dry cloth at regular intervals. Moisture and dust may lead to fire or electrical shock.

Glossary

DLNA

Digital Living Network Alliance

DVI

Digital Visual Interface - A high quality video interface standard to connect to the display

ETHERNET

One of the popular standards of LAN

EPG

Electronic Programme Guide - A digital guide showing scheduled programmes

Frame Sequential

The 3D format that the separated images for the left and right eyes are recorded with the high definition quality and alternately played back at the high speed

HDMI

High-Definition Multimedia Interface - A digital audio and video interface for transmitting uncompressed digital signals on a single cable

LAN

Local Area Network

MAC Address

Media Access control Address

NICAM

Near Instantaneous Companded Audio Multiplex - A format for digital sound over television

NTSC

National Television System Committee - One of the television signals used in USA, etc.

RF

Radio Frequency - Signal received from terrestrial aerial

RGB / Video

Choose between these three video formats depending on personal preference and equipment requirement (RGB - Red, Green and Blue)

SCART

21 pin connection used for video, audio and switching signals (Also known as Euro SCART and Peritel)

Shop viewing environment

Shop viewing environment is the demonstration mode to explain main features of this TV in an easy understandable way. This mode will work if you select [Shop] in "Auto Setup" (p. 16).

Side by Side

One of the types of 3D format available for broadcasts

SPDIF

A standard audio transfer file format

Top and Bottom

One of the types of 3D format available for broadcasts

USB

Universal Serial Bus - An interface specification to connect devices

VCR

Video Cassette Recorder

24p

Progressive images recorded at a rate of 24 frames per second (film source)

Index

A Accessories 6

Advanced Settings ......39, 66, 67

Analogue Tuning Menu 49, 54

Aspect 21,

Astra 11,56,114

Audio Description 20,40

Auto Gain Control 40

Auto Setup 13, 48, 49

Auto Standby

AV1 out 41,97

B Banner Display Timeout 43

Cable TV box 12, 103

Category list 24

C.A.T.S. 38

Channel List 51, 54, 55, 57

Channel Sorting by Region ……52

Child Lock 60

Clamper 11

Common Interface 64

COMPONENT 105,

Connection

11, 12, 68, 85, 95, 96, 103 - 105

D Direct TV Recording 97, 99

DivX 1

DLNA 84

D-sub 15-pin

DTS 82

DVB Tuning Menu 49, 52 - 54

DVD Recorder ..... 11, 12, 30, 95, 103

DVI

DVI Input Setting 39

E EPG 22

Eurobird 1 56

External equipment

11, 12, 30, 103 - 105

External input 30, 31

F FAQs 114-116

Favourites Edit ....50, 53, 57

Frame Sequential 32,34

Free input menu 37,110

freesat Tuning Menu......48, 50

G Glossary 119

Guide link programming ......25

H HDMI 109, 110, 123

HDMI Content Detection ......41

Hold 20,

10Glome Cinema

Hotbird 56

I Information banner ......19

Input Labels

Input signal

41Intelligent Frame Creation 39

Last view....19

M Mains Lead 11

Mains power On / Off switch -10, 13

Maintenance

Manual Tuning....52, 55, 57

Media Player 72 - 83

Menu Functions 37 - 47

60 Monaural Audio

Multi Audio

Music mode

N Network connections 85

Network Setup 86 - 90

New Channel Message 53

NICAM 40

NTSC 38,

Off Timer 20, 41

11One Touch Recording ....

Optional accessories......

Other Sat. (Satellite) Tuning Menu…56

Owner ID 15,61

11P PAL 106

Pixel Orbiter

Pedestal

Photo mode 73

...PIN number ......15, 60, 63, 67

Playing Time Display

P-NR 38

Power and Timer LED ·10, 24, 58, 70

Q Link 95, 97

Q-Link Download....13, 41

Quick Start Guide 6 - 16

R Radio Mode 43

Remote control 6,7,9

Reset to Defaults 39,40

Reversal Film Effect 38

Rewind LIVE TV 71

RGB 123

S Safely remove USB 20

Sales and Support Information…124

SCART....109, 123

1SD Card 72,109

Search list 23, 24

Shipping Condition 62

Side by Side 32, 34

Signal Condition 51, 53

Slideshow 74, 92

Software Update......65, 90

Specifications 122, 123

Split Programme 25

119 Subtitles 21, 29

System Update 65

T Teletext 27 - 29

THX 38

Timer Programming 24,58

Top and Bottom 32, 34

True Cinema 38

TV Guide 22 - 26

TV Guide Settings 41

U Update Channel List 54

USB Charge in Standby 43

USB Flash Memory 72,109

USB HDD 68,109

...70USB connection 111

V-Audio Surround 40

VCR 11, 12, 31, 103

Video mode 78

VIERA Connect....17, 94

VIERA Link......95, 96, 98 - 102

7 VIERA TOOLS 36

3 Viewing Mode 38

Vivid Colour 38

Volume Correction 20,40

W Wireless LAN Adaptor......

6, 12, 14, 15, 85

WSS 106

Zoom 21,76

24p Smooth Film 39

3D Eyewear 6, 32, 33

3D Refresh Rate 39

3D Settings....35

Licence

Even if no special notation has been made of company or product trademarks, these trademarks have been fully respected.

- "freesat" is a registered trademark and the "freesat" logo is a trademark of Freesat (UK) Ltd.

• DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.

• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

- HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

- HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

- "AVCHD" and the "AVCHD" logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.

• x.v.Colour™ is a trademark.

- THX and the THX logo are trademarks of THX Ltd. which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.

• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

• Manufactured under license from Real Sound Lab, SIA. CONEQ is a trademark of Real Sound Lab, SIA.

- Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

• VIERA Connect is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

- DLNA ^ , the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED ^TM are trademarks, service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network Alliance.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

- DivX ^ , DivX Certified ^ , DivX Plus ^TM HD and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.

- The Skype name, associated trade marks and logos and the "S" symbol are trade marks of Skype Limited.

- "RealD 3D" is a trademark of RealD. This product is covered by U.S. Patent 5,193,000 until 28 August, 2011.

- QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc., used under license therefrom.

GUIDE Plus+ is (1) a registered trademark or trademark of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Rovi Corporation and/or its related affiliates.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Licence - 1

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Licence - 2

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Licence - 3

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Licence - 4

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Licence - 5

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Licence - 6

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Licence - 7

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Licence - 8

Specifications

TX-P42GT30B TX-P46GT30B TX-P50GT30B
Power Source AC 220-240 V, 50 / 60 Hz
Rated Power Consumption 325 W 340 W 400 W
Standby Power Consumption0.30 W30.00 W (With monitor out recording)
Dimensions (W × H × D)993 mm × 649 mm ×320 mm (With Pedestal)993 mm × 615 mm ×58 mm (TV only)1,091 mm × 705 mm ×335 mm (With Pedestal)1,091 mm × 670 mm ×58 mm (TV only)1,177 mm × 753 mm ×335 mm (With Pedestal)1,177 mm × 718 mm ×58 mm (TV only)
Mass23.0k g Net (With Pedestal) 26.5 k Net (With Pedestal) 29.5 k19.5k g Net (TV only) 22.5 k Net (TV only) 25.5 k Net (TV only)Net (With Pedestal)g
Display panelAspect Ratio 16:9
Visible screen size106 cm (diagonal)921 mm (W) × 518 mm (H)117 cm (diagonal)1,019 mm (W) × 573 mm (H)127 cm (diagonal)1,105 mm (W) × 622 mm (H)
Number of pixels 2,073,600 (1,920 (W) × 1,080 (H)) [5,760 × 1,080 dots]
SoundSpeaker (140 mm × 35 mm) × 2,6 Ω
Audio Output 20 W (10 W + 10 W)
Headphones M3 (3.5 mm) stereo mini Jack × 1
Operating ConditionsTemperature: 0 °C - 35 °CHumidity: 20 % - 80 % RH (non-condensing)
Satellite dish input Female F-type 7 5 Ω
Aerial inputUK UHF Ireland VHF / UHF
Receiving Systems / Band nameUKDVB-S / S2 freesat frequency range - 950 MHz to 2,150 MHzOther Sat. LNB Power and Polarisation - Vertical: +13 VHorizontal: +18 VCurrent: Max. 500 mA (overload protection)22 kHz Tone - Frequency: 22 kHz ± 2 kHzAmplitude: 0.6 V ± 0.2 VSymbol Rate - Max. 30 MS/sFEC Mode - 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10Demodulation - QPSK, 8PSKNot available for DiSEqC control.DVB-T / T2 Digital terrestrial services.PAL I UHF E21-68PAL 525/60 Playback of NTSC tape from some PAL Video recorders (VCR) orNTSC disc playback from DVD player and recorder.M.NTSC Playback from M.NTSC Video recorders (VCR).NTSC (AV input only) Playback from NTSC Video recorders (VCR).
Receiving Systems / Band nameIrelandDVB-S / S2 Receiver frequency range - 950 MHz to 2,150 MHzLNB Power and Polarisation - Vertical: +13 VHorizontal: +18 VCurrent: Max. 500 mA (overload protection)22 kHz Tone - Frequency: 22 kHz ± 2 kHzAmplitude: 0.6 V ± 0.2 VSymbol Rate - Max. 30 MS/sFEC Mode - 1/2, 3/5, 2/3, 3/4, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10Demodulation - QPSK, 8PSKNot available for DiSEqC control.DVB-T Digital terrestrial services.PAL I VHF A -J UHF E21 - E69CATV S1 - S20 CATV S21 - S41 (Hyperband)PAL 525/60Playback of NTSC tape from some PAL Video recorders (VCR) or NTSC disc playback from DVD player and recorder.M.NTSC Playback from M.NTSC Video recorders (VCR).NTSC (AV input only) Playback from NTSC Video recorders (VCR).
Connection TerminalsAV1 (SCART) 21 Pin terminal (Audio/Video in, Audio/Video out, RGB in, Q-Link)
AV2 inputVIDEORCA PIN Type × 1 1.0 V[p-p] (75 Ω)
AUDIO L - R RCA PINType × 2 0.5 V[rms]
COMPONENT inputY 1.0 V[p-p] (including synchronization) P_B , P_R ±0.35 V[p-p]
HDMI 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 inputTYPE A ConnectorsHDMI1 / 3 / 4 : HDMI (Version 1.4 with 3D, Content Type), Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTMHDMI2 : HDMI (Version 1.4 with 3D, Content Type, Audio Return Channel), Deep Colour, x.v.ColourTMThis TV supports "HDAVI Control 5" function.
Card slotSD Card slot × 1Common Interface slot × 1
ETHERNET RJ45, IEEE802.310BASE-T / 100BASE-TX
USB 1 / 2 / 3USB2.0 DC 5 V, Max. 500 mA
AUDIO OUTRCA PIN Type × 2 0.5 V[rms] (high impedance)
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPCM / Dolby Digital / DTS, Fiber optic
  • Design and Specifications are subject to change without notice. Mass and Dimensions shown are approximate.
    ● This equipment complies with the EMC standards listed below.
    EN55013, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3, EN55020, EN55022, EN55024

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries - 1

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries - 2

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.

Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries - 3

For business users in the European Union

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.

Sales and Support Information

Customer Care Centre

• For customers within the UK: 0844 844 3852
• For customers within Ireland: 01 289 8333
- Visit our website for product information: www.panasonic.co.uk
• E-mail: customer.care@panasonic.co.uk

Direct Sales at Panasonic UK

• For customers: 0844 844 3856
- Order accessory and consumable items for your product with ease and confidence by phoning our Customer Care Centre Monday – Thursday 9:00am – 5:30pm, Friday 9:30am – 5:30pm (Excluding public holidays).
- Or go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering application at www.pas-europe.com.
- Most major credit and debit cards accepted.
- All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities are provided directly by Panasonic UK Ltd.
- It couldn't be simpler!
- Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a wide range of finished products, take a browse on our website for further details.

Freesat

- For more information and support about Freesat, visit www.freesat.co.uk

PANASONIC TX-P50GT30B - Freesat - 1

Declaration of Conformity (DoC)

Authorized Representative :

Panasonic Testing Centre

Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

Customer's Record

The model number and serial number of this product may be found on its rear panel. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this book, plus your purchase receipt, as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft or loss, and for Warranty Service purposes.

Model Number Serial Number

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : PANASONIC

Model : TX-P50GT30B

Category : TV